-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// Display the whole course as "topics" made of of modules
// In fact, this is very similar to the "weeks" format, in that
// each "topic" is actually a week. The main difference is that
/// Layout the whole page as three big columns.
- echo "<table border=\"0\" cellpadding=\"3\" cellspacing=\"0\" width="100%">";
+ echo "<table border=\"0\" cellpadding=\"3\" cellspacing=\"0\" width=\"100%\">";
echo "<tr valign=\"top\">\n";
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// admin.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// appointment.php - created with Moodle 1.0.5 dev (2002092300)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// assignment.php - created with Moodle 1.2 + (2004032100)
-<?PHP
+<?php
#------------------------------------------------------------
$string['modulename'] = "Attendance";
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// auth.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['auth_dbdescription'] = 'This method uses an external database table to check whether a given username and password is valid. If the account is a new one, then information from other fields may also be copied across into Moodle.';
-$string['auth_dbextrafields'] = 'These fields are optional. You can choose to pre-fill some Moodle user fields with information from the <B>external database fields</B> that you specify here. <P>If you leave these blank, then defaults will be used.<P>In either case, the user will be able to edit all of these fields after they log in.';
+$string['auth_dbextrafields'] = 'These fields are optional. You can choose to pre-fill some Moodle user fields with information from the <b>external database fields</b> that you specify here. <p>If you leave these blank, then defaults will be used.<p>In either case, the user will be able to edit all of these fields after they log in.';
$string['auth_dbfieldpass'] = 'Name of the field containing passwords';
$string['auth_dbfielduser'] = 'Name of the field containing usernames';
$string['auth_dbhost'] = 'The computer hosting the database server.';
$string['auth_ldap_user_attribute'] = 'The attribute used to name/search users. Usually \'cn\'.';
$string['auth_ldap_objectclass'] = 'The filter used to name/search users. Usually you will set it to something like objectClass=posixAccount . Defaults to objectClass=* what will return all objects from LDAP.';
$string['auth_ldap_version'] = 'The version of the LDAP protocol your server is using.';
-$string['auth_ldapdescription'] = 'This method provides authentication against an external LDAP server.\r
- If the given username and password are valid, Moodle creates a new user \r
- entry in its database. This module can read user attributes from LDAP and prefill \r
- wanted fields in Moodle. For following logins only the username and \r
+$string['auth_ldapdescription'] = 'This method provides authentication against an external LDAP server.
+
+ If the given username and password are valid, Moodle creates a new user
+
+ entry in its database. This module can read user attributes from LDAP and prefill
+
+ wanted fields in Moodle. For following logins only the username and
+
password are checked.';
-$string['auth_ldapextrafields'] = 'These fields are optional. You can choose to pre-fill some Moodle user fields with information from the <B>LDAP fields</B> that you specify here. <P>If you leave these fields blank, then nothing will be transferred from LDAP and Moodle defaults will be used instead.<P>In either case, the user will be able to edit all of these fields after they log in.';
+$string['auth_ldapextrafields'] = 'These fields are optional. You can choose to pre-fill some Moodle user fields with information from the <b>LDAP fields</b> that you specify here. <p>If you leave these fields blank, then nothing will be transferred from LDAP and Moodle defaults will be used instead.<p>In either case, the user will be able to edit all of these fields after they log in.';
$string['auth_ldaptitle'] = 'Use an LDAP server';
$string['auth_manualdescription'] = 'This method removes any way for users to create their own accounts. All accounts must be manually created by the admin user.';
$string['auth_manualtitle'] = 'Manual accounts only';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['blockname'] = 'Course List';
$string['allcourses'] = 'Admin user sees all courses';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['blockname'] = 'Course Summary';
$string['siteinfo'] = 'Site Information';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['blockname'] = 'Online Users';
$string['periodnminutes'] = 'last $a minutes';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['blockname'] = 'Section Links';
$string['topics'] = 'Topics';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['blockname'] = 'Social Activities';
?>
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['beep'] = 'beep';
$string['chatintro'] = 'Introduction text';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// choice.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// countries.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// dialogue.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['deleteafter'] = 'Delete Closed Dialogues after (Days)';
$string['dialogueclosed'] = 'Dialogue Closed';
$string['dialogueintro'] = 'Dialogue Introduction';
-$string['dialoguemail'] = '$a->userfrom has posted a new entry in your\r
-dialogue entry for \'$a->dialogue\'\r
-\r
-You can see it appended to your dialogue entry:\r
-\r
+$string['dialoguemail'] = '$a->userfrom has posted a new entry in your
+
+dialogue entry for \'$a->dialogue\'
+
+
+
+You can see it appended to your dialogue entry:
+
+
+
$a->url';
-$string['dialoguemailhtml'] = '$a->userfrom has posted a new entry in your\r
-dialogue entry for \'<i>$a->dialogue</i>\'<br /><br />\r
+$string['dialoguemailhtml'] = '$a->userfrom has posted a new entry in your
+
+dialogue entry for \'<i>$a->dialogue</i>\'<br /><br />
+
You can see it appended to your <a href=\"$a->url\">dialogue</a>.';
$string['dialoguename'] = 'Dialogue name';
$string['dialogueopened'] = 'Dialogue opened with $a';
Dougiamas</a> who continues to lead the project:</p>
<blockquote>
<p><em>I've been working on it, in some way or other, for several years. It
- started in the 90's when I was webmaster at <a target=_top href="http://www.curtin.edu.au/">Curtin
+ started in the 90's when I was webmaster at <a target="_top" href="http://www.curtin.edu.au/">Curtin
University of Technology</a> and a system administrator of their WebCT installation.
I encountered many frustrations with the WebCT beast and developed an itch
that needed scratching - there had to be a better way (no, not Blackboard
meaningful lowercase English words. If you really need more than one word
then run them together, but keep them short as possible. Use
plural names for arrays of objects.
- <p class="examplecode"><font color="#006600">GOOD: $quiz<br>
- GOOD: $errorstring<br>
-GOOD: $assignments (for an array of objects)<br>
- GOOD: $i (but only in little loops)<br>
+ <p class="examplecode"><font color="#006600">GOOD: $quiz<br />
+ GOOD: $errorstring<br />
+GOOD: $assignments (for an array of objects)<br />
+ GOOD: $i (but only in little loops)<br />
<br />
- BAD: $Quiz <br>
- BAD: $aReallyLongVariableNameWithoutAGoodReason<br>
+ BAD: $Quiz <br />
+ BAD: $aReallyLongVariableNameWithoutAGoodReason<br />
BAD: $error_string</font></p>
</li>
<li class="spaced"><strong>Constants</strong> should always be in upper case,
lowercase words, and start with the name of the module to avoid conflicts between modules.
Words should be separated by underscores. Parameters should always have sensible
defaults if possible. Note there is no space between the function name and
- the following (brackets). <br>
+ the following (brackets). <br />
<p class="examplecode"> <font color="#007700">function </font><font color="#0000BB">forum_set_display_mode</font><font color="#007700">(</font><font color="#0000BB">$mode</font><font color="#007700">=</font><font color="#0000BB">0</font><font color="#007700">)
{<br />
global </font><font color="#0000BB">$USER</font><font color="#007700">,
}</font></p>
</li>
<li class="spaced"><strong>Strings</strong> should be defined using single quotes
- where possible, for increased speed.<br>
+ where possible, for increased speed.<br />
<p class="examplecode"> <font color="#006600">$var = 'some text without any
- variables';<br>
- $var = "with special characters like a new line \n";<br>
- $var = 'a very, very long string with a '.$single.' variable in it';<br>
+ variables';<br />
+ $var = "with special characters like a new line \n";<br />
+ $var = 'a very, very long string with a '.$single.' variable in it';<br />
$var = "some $text with $many variables $within it"; </font></p>
</li>
<li class="spaced"><strong>Comments</strong> should use two or three slashes
if (</font><font color="#0000BB">$rates
</font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">get_records</font><font color="#007700">(</font><font color="#DD0000">"forum_ratings"</font><font color="#007700">,
</font><font color="#DD0000">"post"</font><font color="#007700">, </font><font color="#0000BB">$postid</font><font color="#007700">))
- {<br>
+ {<br />
</font><font color="#FF8000">//
Process each rating in turn</font><font color="#007700"><br />
foreach
(</font><font color="#0000BB">$rates </font><font color="#007700">as </font><font color="#0000BB">$rate</font><font color="#007700">)
- {</font> <br>
+ {</font> <br />
....etc </p>
</li>
<li class="spaced"><strong>Space</strong> should be used liberally - don't be
afraid to spread things out a little to gain some clarity. Generally, there
should be one space between brackets and normal statements, but no space between
- brackets and variables or functions:<br>
+ brackets and variables or functions:<br />
<p class="examplecode"> <font color="#007700">foreach (</font><font color="#0000BB">$objects
</font><font color="#007700">as </font><font color="#0000BB">$key </font><font color="#007700">=></font><font color="#0000BB">
- $thing</font><font color="#007700">)</font><font color="#006600"> {<br>
+ $thing</font><font color="#007700">)</font><font color="#006600"> {<br />
</font><font color="#007700"> </font><font color="#0000BB">process($thing);</font><font color="#006600">
- <br>
- } <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ } <br />
+ <br />
</font><font color="#007700">if (</font><font color="#0000BB">$x </font><font color="#007700">==
</font><font color="#0000BB">$y</font><font color="#007700">)</font><font color="#006600">
- {<br>
+ {<br />
</font><font color="#007700"> </font><font color="#0000BB">$a
- </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$b</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br>
+ </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$b</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br />
} else if (</font><font color="#0000BB">$x </font><font color="#007700">==
- </font><font color="#0000BB">$z</font><font color="#006600">) {<br>
+ </font><font color="#0000BB">$z</font><font color="#006600">) {<br />
</font><font color="#007700"> </font><font color="#0000BB">$a
- </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$c</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br>
- } else {<br>
+ </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$c</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br />
+ } else {<br />
</font><font color="#007700"> </font><font color="#0000BB">$a
- </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$d</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br>
+ </font><font color="#007700">= </font><font color="#0000BB">$d</font><font color="#007700">;</font><font color="#006600"><br />
} </font></p>
</li>
</ol>
<li class="spaced">Boolean fields should be implemented as small integer fields (eg INT4) containing 0 or 1, to allow for later expansion of values if necessary.</li>
<li class="spaced">Most tables should have a <strong>timemodified</strong> field (INT10) which is updated with a current timestamp obtained with the PHP <strong>time</strong>() function.</li>
</ol>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1">Version: $Id$</font></p>
</body>
<p>Thanks also to <strong>everyone</strong> of you who have
</p>
<ul>
- <li>donated via the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/donations">Donations
+ <li>donated via the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/donations">Donations
page</a>,
</li>
- <li>contributed to the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/bugs">bug tracker</a>,
+ <li>contributed to the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/bugs">bug tracker</a>,
and
</li>
- <li>participated in the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/community">Moodle
+ <li>participated in the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/community">Moodle
Community</a> </li>
</ul>
</blockquote>
over 1000 phrases to translate (plus hundreds of help files!). Many of the languages
have more than one contributor, sometimes working together and sometimes working serially.
</p>
- <p>Maintaining a list of all these wonderful people is too difficult, so please look at the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/download/lang/">Language
+ <p>Maintaining a list of all these wonderful people is too difficult, so please look at the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/download/lang/">Language
download page</a> for names and details.</p>
<p>The Translation Coordinator is Koen Roggemans (<a href="mailto:tra%6es%6ca%74%69o%6e%40%6d%6f%6f%64%6c%65.org">translation@moodle.org</a>).</p>
<p> </p>
<ul>
<li><b>standard* and cordoroyblue</b>, by Martin Dougiamas
</li>
- <li><b>oceanblue</b>, by Mitsuhiro Yoshida, <a target=_top href="http://mitstek.com">http://mitstek.com</a>
+ <li><b>oceanblue</b>, by Mitsuhiro Yoshida, <a target="_top" href="http://mitstek.com">http://mitstek.com</a>
</li>
- <li><b>brightretro, cornflower</b>, by Thomas Murdock, <a target=_top href="http://sand-paper.org/">http://sand-paper.org</a>
+ <li><b>brightretro, cornflower</b>, by Thomas Murdock, <a target="_top" href="http://sand-paper.org/">http://sand-paper.org</a>
</li>
- <li><b>garden</b>, by Spiggy, <a target=_top href="http://phpgirl.com">http://phpgirl.com</a> </li>
+ <li><b>garden</b>, by Spiggy, <a target="_top" href="http://phpgirl.com">http://phpgirl.com</a> </li>
<li><strong>formal_white</strong>, by Andrea Bicciolo</li>
</ul>
<p> </p>
<blockquote>
<p>Database abstraction library for MySQL, PostgreSQL, MSSQL, Oracle, Interbase,
Foxpro, Access, ADO, Sybase, DB2 and ODBC.</p>
- <p>Version: 4.50<br>
- Copyright © 2000-2004 John Lim (jlim@natsoft.com.my)<br>
- License: Dual LGPL and BSD-style<br>
- URL: <a href="http://adodb.sourceforge.net" target="newpage">http://adodb.sourceforge.net</a><br>
+ <p>Version: 4.50<br />
+ Copyright © 2000-2004 John Lim (jlim@natsoft.com.my)<br />
+ License: Dual LGPL and BSD-style<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://adodb.sourceforge.net" target="newpage">http://adodb.sourceforge.net</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>Graph Class</b> - lib/graphlib.php </p>
<blockquote>
<p>Class to draw line, point, bar, and area graphs, including numeric x-axis
and double y-axis.</p>
- <p> Version: 1.6.3 (with modifications)<br>
- Copyright © 2000 Herman Veluwenkamp, hermanV@mindless.com<br>
- License: LGPL<br>
+ <p> Version: 1.6.3 (with modifications)<br />
+ Copyright © 2000 Herman Veluwenkamp, hermanV@mindless.com<br />
+ License: LGPL<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>html2text</b> - lib/html2text.php</p>
<blockquote>
<p>PHP script to convert HTML into an approximate text equivalent</p>
- <p> Version: 1.0 (with modifications)<br>
- Copyright © 2002 Mark Wilton-Jones<br>
- License: <a href="http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/jslibs/termsOfUse.html">HowToCreate script license</a> with written permission<br>
- URL: <a href="http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/php/">http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/php/</a><br>
+ <p> Version: 1.0 (with modifications)<br />
+ Copyright © 2002 Mark Wilton-Jones<br />
+ License: <a href="http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/jslibs/termsOfUse.html">HowToCreate script license</a> with written permission<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/php/">http://www.howtocreate.co.uk/php/</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>htmlArea</b> - lib/editor</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Javascript/HTML script to put a GUI editor in textareas on Internet Explorer and Mozilla</p>
- <p> Version: 3.0 beta (with modifications)<br>
- Copyright © 2002 <a href="http://interactivetools.com">interactivetools.com</a>, inc.<br>
- License: htmlArea License (based on BSD license)<br>
+ <p> Version: 3.0 beta (with modifications)<br />
+ Copyright © 2002 <a href="http://interactivetools.com">interactivetools.com</a>, inc.<br />
+ License: htmlArea License (based on BSD license)<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>IP-Atlas</b> - lib/ipatlas</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>PHP scripts to show the location of an IP address on a map.<br>
- <br>
- Version: 1.0 (with modifications)<br>
- Copyright © 2002 Ivan Kozik<br>
- License: GNU GPL<br>
+ <p>PHP scripts to show the location of an IP address on a map.<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 1.0 (with modifications)<br />
+ Copyright © 2002 Ivan Kozik<br />
+ License: GNU GPL<br />
URL: <a href="http://www.xpenguin.com/ip-atlas.php" target="newpage">http://www.xpenguin.com/ip-atlas.php</a></p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>kses</b> - lib/kses.php</p>
<blockquote>
<p>HTML/XHTML filter that only allows some elements and attributes</p>
- <p>Version: 0.2.1<br>
+ <p>Version: 0.2.1<br />
Copyright © 2002,2003 Ulf Harnhammar <br />
- License: GNU GPL<br>
+ License: GNU GPL<br />
URL: <a href="http://sourceforge.net/projects/kses" target="newpage">http://sourceforge.net/projects/kses</a>
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>mimeTeX</b> - filter/tex</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>Compiled C program to convert TeX into GIFs<br>
- <br>
- Version: 1.4 <br>
- Copyright © 2002-2004 John Forkosh Associates, Inc<br>
- License: GNU GPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html">http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html</a><br>
+ <p>Compiled C program to convert TeX into GIFs<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 1.4 <br />
+ Copyright © 2002-2004 John Forkosh Associates, Inc<br />
+ License: GNU GPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html">http://www.forkosh.com/mimetex.html</a><br />
URL: <a href="http://moodle.org/download/mimetex">http://moodle.org/download/mimetex</a></p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>overlibmws</b> - lib/overlib.js</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>Javascript library to enable DHTML popups, floating windows, events etc<br>
- <br>
- Version: July 2004<br>
- Copyright © 2002-2004 Foteos Macrides<br>
- Copyright © 1998-2004 Erik Bosrup<br>
- License: Artistic Open Source License<br>
- URL: <a href="http://www.macridesweb.com/oltest/">http://www.macridesweb.com/oltest/</a><br>
+ <p>Javascript library to enable DHTML popups, floating windows, events etc<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: July 2004<br />
+ Copyright © 2002-2004 Foteos Macrides<br />
+ Copyright © 1998-2004 Erik Bosrup<br />
+ License: Artistic Open Source License<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://www.macridesweb.com/oltest/">http://www.macridesweb.com/oltest/</a><br />
</blockquote>
<p><b>PclZip</b> - lib/pclzip</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>Class to create, manage and unpack zip files.<br>
- <br>
- Version: 2.0 RC2<br>
- Copyright © 2003 Vincent Blavet <vincent@phpconcept.net><br>
- License: GNU GPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://www.phpconcept.net" target="newpage">http://www.phpconcept.net</a><br>
+ <p>Class to create, manage and unpack zip files.<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 2.0 RC2<br />
+ Copyright © 2003 Vincent Blavet <vincent@phpconcept.net><br />
+ License: GNU GPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://www.phpconcept.net" target="newpage">http://www.phpconcept.net</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>PHP mailer</b> - lib/class.phpmailer.php</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Class for sending email using either sendmail, PHP mail(), or SMTP.
- Methods are based upon the standard AspEmail(tm) classes.<br>
- <br>
- Version 1.71,<br>
- Copyright © 2003 Brent R. Matzelle <bmatzelle@yahoo.com><br>
- License: LGPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://phpmailer.sourceforge.net" target="newpage">http://phpmailer.sourceforge.net</a><br>
+ Methods are based upon the standard AspEmail(tm) classes.<br />
+ <br />
+ Version 1.71,<br />
+ Copyright © 2003 Brent R. Matzelle <bmatzelle@yahoo.com><br />
+ License: LGPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://phpmailer.sourceforge.net" target="newpage">http://phpmailer.sourceforge.net</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>PHP Markdown</b> - lib/markdown.php </p>
<blockquote>
<p>Functions to convert from the Markdown text format into clean XHTML.</p>
- <p> Version: 1.0b9 (with modifications)<br>
- Copyright © 2003-2004 , John Gruber<br>
- Copyright © 2004 , Michel Fortin<br>
- License: LGPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://www.michelf.com/projects/php-markdown/" target="newpage">http://www.michelf.com/projects/php-markdown/</a><br>
+ <p> Version: 1.0b9 (with modifications)<br />
+ Copyright © 2003-2004 , John Gruber<br />
+ Copyright © 2004 , Michel Fortin<br />
+ License: LGPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://www.michelf.com/projects/php-markdown/" target="newpage">http://www.michelf.com/projects/php-markdown/</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p>
<p><b>Snoopy</b> - lib/snoopy</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>A PHP net client<br>
- <br>
- Version: 1.0<br>
- Copyright © 1999-2000 Monte Ohrt <monte@ispi.net><br>
- License: GNU LGPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://snoopy.sourceforge.com">http://snoopy.sourceforge.com</a><br>
+ <p>A PHP net client<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 1.0<br />
+ Copyright © 1999-2000 Monte Ohrt <monte@ispi.net><br />
+ License: GNU LGPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://snoopy.sourceforge.com">http://snoopy.sourceforge.com</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>Spreadsheet::WriteExcel</b> - lib/excel</p>
<blockquote>
- <p>A library for generating Excel Spreadsheets.<br>
- <br>
- Version: 2002-11-28<br>
- Copyright © 2002 Xavier Noguer <xnoguer@rezebra.com><br>
- License: GNU LGPL<br>
- URL: <a href="http://jeffn.users.phpclasses.org/browse.html/package/767.html" target="newpage">http://jeffn.users.phpclasses.org/browse.html/package/767.html</a><br>
+ <p>A library for generating Excel Spreadsheets.<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 2002-11-28<br />
+ Copyright © 2002 Xavier Noguer <xnoguer@rezebra.com><br />
+ License: GNU LGPL<br />
+ URL: <a href="http://jeffn.users.phpclasses.org/browse.html/package/767.html" target="newpage">http://jeffn.users.phpclasses.org/browse.html/package/767.html</a><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<p><b>SMTP class </b>- lib/class.smtp.php</p>
<blockquote>
<p>Class that can be used to connect and communicate with any SMTP
- server. <br>
- It implements all the SMTP functions defined in RFC821 except TURN.<br>
- <br>
- Version: 03/26/2001 <br>
+ server. <br />
+ It implements all the SMTP functions defined in RFC821 except TURN.<br />
+ <br />
+ Version: 03/26/2001 <br />
Copyright © 2001 Chris Ryan <chris@greatbridge.com></p>
- <p><br>
+ <p><br />
</p>
</blockquote>
</blockquote>
<ol>
<li><a href="#1">Joining the project as a developer</a></li>
<li><a href="#2">CVS Modules</a> </li>
- <li><a href="#3">Basic CVS Commands</a> <br>
- 3.1. <a href="#3.1">CVS on Unix</a> <br>
+ <li><a href="#3">Basic CVS Commands</a> <br />
+ 3.1. <a href="#3.1">CVS on Unix</a> <br />
3.2. <a href="#3.2">CVS on Windows</a></li>
- <li> <a href="#4">Working with Branches</a><br>
- 4.1. <a href="#4.1">Trunk development</a><br>
- 4.2. <a href="#4.2">Stable branches for each release</a><br>
+ <li> <a href="#4">Working with Branches</a><br />
+ 4.1. <a href="#4.1">Trunk development</a><br />
+ 4.2. <a href="#4.2">Stable branches for each release</a><br />
4.3. <a href="#4.3">Feature branches for large changes</a> </li>
</ol>
<p> </p>
<pre> :ext:<font color="#990000">myusername</font>@cvs.sourceforge.net:/cvsroot/moodle</pre>
</li>
<li>Under the "Module" field, type "<strong>moodle</strong>" to get the latest development version of Moodle, "<strong>contrib</strong>" to get the contributions directory, or "<strong>mysql</strong>" to get the MySQL Admin module.</li>
- <li>Press the button: "<strong>OK</strong>" and everything should be downloaded.<br>
+ <li>Press the button: "<strong>OK</strong>" and everything should be downloaded.<br />
</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<ol>
<ol>
<li> Right-mouse-click on your Moodle folder (or any file) and select "<strong>CVS Update</strong>". </li>
- <li>Sit back and watch the logs scroll by. Take note of conflicts that may occur if your local code has changes that conflict with the incoming versions - you will need to edit these files and resolve the conflicts manually. <br>
+ <li>Sit back and watch the logs scroll by. Take note of conflicts that may occur if your local code has changes that conflict with the incoming versions - you will need to edit these files and resolve the conflicts manually. <br />
</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<ol>
<li> Right-mouse-click on your Moodle folder (or any file) and select "<strong>CVS Commit...</strong>".</li>
<li>In the dialog box, type a clear description of the changes you are committing.</li>
- <li>Click "OK". Your changes will be sent to the server.<br>
+ <li>Click "OK". Your changes will be sent to the server.<br />
</li>
</ol>
</ol>
<p>Periodically, bug fixes in the STABLE branch should be merged into the trunk so that they become available in future versions of Moodle. A floating tag called MOODLE_XX_MERGED will be maintained to keep track of the last merge. The procedure for such a merge is as follows:</p>
<ol>
<ol>
- <li>Get out the very latest trunk version.<br>
- <br>
+ <li>Get out the very latest trunk version.<br />
+ <br />
<div class="commandline">cvs update -dPA</div>
</li>
- <li>Merge everything on the branch since the last merge, into your trunk version<br><br>
+ <li>Merge everything on the branch since the last merge, into your trunk version<br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs update -kk -j MOODLE_13_MERGED -j MOODLE_13_STABLE</div>
</li>
<li>Carefully watch the update logs for conflicts, and fix every file that you see with a conflict</li>
- <li>Check the merged copy back into CVS trunk version<br>
- <br>
+ <li>Check the merged copy back into CVS trunk version<br />
+ <br />
<div class="commandline">cvs commit</div>
</li>
- <li>Go back to the branch version<br><br>
+ <li>Go back to the branch version<br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs update -dPr MOODLE_13_STABLE</div>
</li>
- <li>Update the floating merge tag so that this process can be repeated next time<br><br>
+ <li>Update the floating merge tag so that this process can be repeated next time<br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs tag -RF MOODLE_13_MERGED</div>
</li>
</ol>
</ol>
- <p><br>
+ <p><br />
Finally, the values for <em>$version</em> in all the Moodle version.php files within the stable branch should not be updated at all if possible (except the last digit if necessary). The reason is that someone updating from a very stable version to the next very stable version could miss database upgrades that happened on the trunk. </p>
</blockquote>
<p> </p>
<ol>
<li>Discuss with other developers to make sure it's necessary!</li>
<li>Make a new tag on the <strong>trunk</strong> (for all of moodle) called <strong>MOODLE_XX_WIDGET_PRE</strong>
- <br><br>
+ <br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs tag -R MOODLE_XX_WIDGET_PRE</div></li>
<li>Create your branch called <span class="style1"><strong>MOODLE_XX_WIDGET</strong></span>
- <br><br>
+ <br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs tag -Rb <span class="style1">MOODLE_XX_WIDGET</span></strong></div></li>
<li>Work in that branch until the feature is reasonably stable. Commit as necessary.
- <br><br>
+ <br /><br />
<div class="commandline">cvs commit</div></li>
<li>When ready, merge the whole branch into the trunk, fix conflicts, commit it to the trunk and then abandon the branch.
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<div class="commandline">
<strong>cvs update -dPA</strong><br />
<strong>cvs update -kk -j <span class="style1">MOODLE_XX_WIDGET</span></strong><br />
<p>From a system administrator's perspective, Moodle has been designed according
to the following criteria:</p>
<ol>
- <li><strong>Moodle should run on the widest variety of platforms</strong><br>
- <br>
+ <li><strong>Moodle should run on the widest variety of platforms</strong><br />
+ <br />
The web application platform that runs on most platforms is PHP combined
with MySQL, and this is the environment that Moodle has been developed in
(on Linux, Windows, and Mac OS X). Moodle also uses the ADOdb library for
database abstraction, which means Moodle can use <a href="http://php.weblogs.com/ADOdb_manual#drivers">more
than ten different brands of database</a> (unfortunately, though, it can
not yet <em><strong>set up tables</strong></em> in all these databases -
- more on this later). <br>
- <br>
+ more on this later). <br />
+ <br />
</li>
- <li><strong>Moodle should be easy to install, learn and modify</strong><br>
- <br>
- Early prototypes of Moodle (1999) were built using <a target=_top href="http://www.zope.org/">Zope</a>
+ <li><strong>Moodle should be easy to install, learn and modify</strong><br />
+ <br />
+ Early prototypes of Moodle (1999) were built using <a target="_top" href="http://www.zope.org/">Zope</a>
- an advanced object-oriented web application server. Unfortunately I found
that although the technology was pretty cool, it had a very steep learning
curve and was not very flexible in terms of system administration. The PHP
by libraries of clearly-named functions and consistent layout of script
files. PHP is also easy to install (binaries are available for every platform)
and is widely available to the point that most web hosting services provide
- it as standard.<br>
- <br>
+ it as standard.<br />
+ <br />
</li>
- <li><strong>It should be easy to upgrade from one version to the next</strong><br>
- <br>
+ <li><strong>It should be easy to upgrade from one version to the next</strong><br />
+ <br />
Moodle knows what version it is (as well as the versions of all plug-in
modules) and a mechanism has been built-in so that Moodle can properly upgrade
itself to new versions (for example it can rename database tables or add
new fields). If using CVS in Unix for example, one can just do a "cvs
- update -d" and then visit the site home page to complete an upgrade.<br>
- <br>
+ update -d" and then visit the site home page to complete an upgrade.<br />
+ <br />
</li>
- <li><strong>It should be modular to allow for growth</strong><br>
- <br>
+ <li><strong>It should be modular to allow for growth</strong><br />
+ <br />
Moodle has a number of features that are modular, including themes, activities,
interface languages, database schemas and course formats. This allows anyone
to add features to the main codebase or to even distribute them separately.
- More on this below in the next section.<br>
- <br>
+ More on this below in the next section.<br />
+ <br />
</li>
- <li><strong>It should be able to be used in conjunction with other systems</strong><br>
- <br>
+ <li><strong>It should be able to be used in conjunction with other systems</strong><br />
+ <br />
One thing Moodle does is keep all files for one course within a single,
normal directory on the server. This would allow a system administrator
to provide seamless forms of file-level access for each teacher, such as
<li>widget_user_outline() - given an instance, return a summary of a
user's contribution</li>
<li>widget_user_complete() - given an instance, print details of a user's
- contribution<br>
+ contribution<br />
</li>
<li>To avoid possible conflict, any module functions should be named
starting with widget_ and any constants you define should start with
the themes for this will be a completely different format, but the advantage
will be a much higher possible degree of customisation (including moving
elements around the page).</p>
- <p>More discussion about this in the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=46">Themes
+ <p>More discussion about this in the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=46">Themes
forum on Using Moodle</a>. If you create a nice theme that you think others
- might want to use, please post your zip file on the themes forum!<br>
+ might want to use, please post your zip file on the themes forum!<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<h3><a name="languages" id="languages"></a>Languages</h3>
<li>quiz.php - strings for quiz module</li>
<li>resource.php - strings for resource module</li>
<li>survey.php - strings for survey module</li>
- <li>.... plus other modules if any.<br>
- <br>
+ <li>.... plus other modules if any.<br />
+ <br />
A string is called from these files using the <strong><em>get_string()</em></strong><em>
</em>or<em> <strong>print_string()</strong> </em>functions. Each string
supports variable substitution, to support variable ordering in different
- languages.<em><br>
- <br>
+ languages.<em><br />
+ <br />
</em>eg $strdueby = get_string("assignmentdueby", "assignment",
- userdate($date)); <br>
- <br>
+ userdate($date)); <br />
+ <br />
If a string doesn't exist in a particular language, then the equivalent
in English will automatically be used instead.</li>
</ul>
<p>Note that you can edit languages online, using the administration web tools
under "Check this language". This makes it easy to not to only
create new languages but to refine existing ones. If you are starting a
- new language, please contact me, <a target=_top href="http://dougiamas.com/">Martin
+ new language, please contact me, <a target="_top" href="http://dougiamas.com/">Martin
Dougiamas</a>. </p>
- <p>You might also like to post in the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=43">Languages
+ <p>You might also like to post in the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=43">Languages
forum on Using Moodle</a>. </p>
<p>If you are maintaining a language an ongoing basis, I can give you <a href="?file=cvs.html">CVS
write access to the Moodle source code</a> so that you can directly maintain
<blockquote>
<p>If you feel like writing a tutorial, an article, an academic paper or anything
else about Moodle, please do! </p>
- <p>Put it on the web and make sure you include links to <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/">http://moodle.org/</a></p>
+ <p>Put it on the web and make sure you include links to <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/">http://moodle.org/</a></p>
</blockquote>
<p> </p>
<h3><a name="bugs" id="bugs"></a>Participating in the bug tracker</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Finally, I would like to invite you to register on the "bug tracker"
- at <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/bugs/">http://moodle.org/bugs</a>
+ at <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/bugs/">http://moodle.org/bugs</a>
so you can file any bugs that you find and perhaps participate in discussing
and fixing them. </p>
<p>"Bugs" not only includes software bugs with current versions
<blockquote>
<blockquote>
<blockquote>
- <p align="center">Thanks for using Moodle!<br>
- <br>
- <a target=_top href="http://dougiamas.com/">Martin Dougiamas</a>, Lead
+ <p align="center">Thanks for using Moodle!<br />
+ <br />
+ <a target="_top" href="http://dougiamas.com/">Martin Dougiamas</a>, Lead
Developer </p>
</blockquote>
</blockquote>
- files\easyphp\www\moodle\config.php on line 94 <br>
+ files\easyphp\www\moodle\config.php on line 94 <br />
-<p class="answercode">magic_quotes_gpc = On<br>
+<p class="answercode">magic_quotes_gpc = On<br />
-<table class=generalbox cellspacing=0 cellpadding=5 align=center border=0>
+<table class="generalbox" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="5" align="center" border="0">
<p class="answer">
-<hr>
+<hr />
-<hr>
+<hr />
<blockquote>
<p>As Moodle gains in maturity, its directions are increasingly influenced by
the community of developers and users. A dynamic database of proposed features
- and their status can be found at <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/bugs/">moodle.org/bugs</a>.
+ and their status can be found at <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/bugs/">moodle.org/bugs</a>.
Your <a href="?file=credits.html">contributions</a> in the form of ideas, code,
feedback and promotion are all very welcome - see the <a href="?file=developer.html">Developers
manual</a> for more details. You can also pay to have certain features developed sooner- see <a href="http://moodle.com/development/" target="_top">moodle.com/development</a> for information and a quote. </p>
<p>To run the installer script (install.php), just try to access your Moodle main URL using a web browser, or access <strong>http://yourserver/install.php</strong> directly. </p>
<p>(The Installer will try to set a session cookie. If you get a popup warning in your browser make sure you accept that cookie!) </p>
<p>Moodle will detect that configuration is necessary and will lead you through some screens to help you create a new configuration file called <strong>config.php. </strong>At the end of the process Moodle will try and write the file into the right location, otherwise you can press a button to download it from the installer and then upload config.php into the main Moodle directory on the server. </p>
- <p>Along the way the installer will test your server environment and give you suggestions about how to fix any problems. For most common issues these suggestions should be sufficient, but if you get stuck, look below for more information about some of common things that might be holding you up. <br>
+ <p>Along the way the installer will test your server environment and give you suggestions about how to fix any problems. For most common issues these suggestions should be sufficient, but if you get stuck, look below for more information about some of common things that might be holding you up. <br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<blockquote>
it config.php</li>
<li> Edit config.php using a text editor (Notepad will do, just be careful
that it doesn't add unwanted spaces at the end). </li>
- <li>Put in all your new database info:<br>
- $CFG->dbtype = 'mysql';<br>
- $CFG->dbhost = 'localhost';<br>
- $CFG->dbname = 'moodle';<br>
- $CFG->dbuser = 'root'; <br>
- $CFG->dbpass = '';<br>
- $CFG->dbpersist = true;<br>
+ <li>Put in all your new database info:<br />
+ $CFG->dbtype = 'mysql';<br />
+ $CFG->dbhost = 'localhost';<br />
+ $CFG->dbname = 'moodle';<br />
+ $CFG->dbuser = 'root'; <br />
+ $CFG->dbpass = '';<br />
+ $CFG->dbpersist = true;<br />
$CFG->prefix = 'mdl_';</li>
- <li>And put in all your file paths:<br>
+ <li>And put in all your file paths:<br />
$CFG->wwwroot = 'http://localhost/moodle'; // Use an external address
- if you know it. <br>
- $CFG->dirroot = 'C:\Program Files\EasyPHP\www\moodle'; <br>
+ if you know it. <br />
+ $CFG->dirroot = 'C:\Program Files\EasyPHP\www\moodle'; <br />
$CFG->dataroot = 'C:\moodledata';</li>
<li>Save config.php - you can ignore the other settings if there are any.</li>
<li>You're nearly there now! The rest of the setup is all web-based. Visit
an online course. Anyone who uses Moodle is a Moodler.</p>
<p>Come <a href="http://moodle.org/community/" target="_top">moodle with us</a>!</p>
</blockquote>
-<p><br>
+<p><br />
</p>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1">Version: $Id$</font></p>
<h1>Copyright License for Moodle</h1>
<blockquote>
- <p>The name <strong>Moodle™</strong> is a registered trademark of The Moodle Trust.<br>
- You have permission to use this name for any activity related to the <br>
+ <p>The name <strong>Moodle™</strong> is a registered trademark of The Moodle Trust.<br />
+ You have permission to use this name for any activity related to the <br />
Moodle software described below.</p>
<p>Moodle software is Copyright © 1999-2004, <a href="http://dougiamas.com/">Martin
Dougiamas</a>.</p>
- <p>This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify<br>
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by<br>
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or<br>
+ <p>This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify<br />
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by<br />
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or<br />
(at your option) any later version.</p>
- <p>This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,<br>
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of<br>
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the<br>
- GNU General Public License for more details (attached below).<br>
+ <p>This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,<br />
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of<br />
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the<br />
+ GNU General Public License for more details (attached below).<br />
</p>
<hr width="100%" size="2">
- <br>
+ <br />
- <pre> GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE<br> Version 2, June 1991<br><br> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.<br> 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA<br> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies<br> of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.<br><br> Preamble<br><br> The licenses for most software are designed to take away your<br>freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public<br>License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free<br>software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This<br>General Public License applies to most of the Free Software<br>Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to<br>using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by<br>the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to<br>your programs, too.<br><br> When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not<br>price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you<br>have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for<br>this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it<br>if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it<br>in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.<br><br> To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid<br>anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.<br>These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you<br>distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.<br><br> For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether<br>gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that<br>you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the<br>source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their<br>rights.<br><br> We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and<br>(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,<br>distribute and/or modify the software.<br><br> Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain<br>that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free<br>software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we<br>want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so<br>that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original<br>authors' reputations.<br><br> Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software<br>patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free<br>program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the<br>program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any<br>patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.<br><br> The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and<br>modification follow.<br>\f<br> GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE<br> TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION<br><br> 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains<br>a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed<br>under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,<br>refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"<br>means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:<br>that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,<br>either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another<br>language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in<br>the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".<br><br>Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not<br>covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of<br>running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program<br>is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the<br>Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).<br>Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.<br><br> 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's<br>source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you<br>conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate<br>copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the<br>notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;<br>and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License<br>along with the Program.<br><br>You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and<br>you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.<br><br> 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion<br>of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and<br>distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1<br>above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:<br><br> a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices<br> stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.<br><br> b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in<br> whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any<br> part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third<br> parties under the terms of this License.<br><br> c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively<br> when run, you must cause it, when started running for such<br> interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an<br> announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a<br> notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide<br> a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under<br> these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this<br> License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but<br> does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on<br> the Program is not required to print an announcement.)<br>\f<br>These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If<br>identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,<br>and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in<br>themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those<br>sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you<br>distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based<br>on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of<br>this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the<br>entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.<br><br>Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest<br>your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to<br>exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or<br>collective works based on the Program.<br><br>In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program<br>with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of<br>a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under<br>the scope of this License.<br><br> 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,<br>under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of<br>Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:<br><br> a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable<br> source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections<br> 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,<br><br> b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three<br> years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your<br> cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete<br> machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be<br> distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium<br> customarily used for software interchange; or,<br><br> c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer<br> to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is<br> allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you<br> received the program in object code or executable form with such<br> an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)<br><br>The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for<br>making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source<br>code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any<br>associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to<br>control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a<br>special exception, the source code distributed need not include<br>anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary<br>form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the<br>operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component<br>itself accompanies the executable.<br><br>If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering<br>access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent<br>access to copy the source code from the same place counts as<br>distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not<br>compelled to copy the source along with the object code.<br>\f<br> 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program<br>except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt<br>otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is<br>void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.<br>However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under<br>this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such<br>parties remain in full compliance.<br><br> 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not<br>signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or<br>distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are<br>prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by<br>modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the<br>Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and<br>all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying<br>the Program or works based on it.<br><br> 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the<br>Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the<br>original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to<br>these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further<br>restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.<br>You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to<br>this License.<br><br> 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent<br>infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),<br>conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or<br>otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not<br>excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot<br>distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this<br>License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you<br>may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent<br>license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by<br>all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then<br>the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to<br>refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.<br><br>If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under<br>any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to<br>apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other<br>circumstances.<br><br>It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any<br>patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any<br>such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the<br>integrity of the free software distribution system, which is<br>implemented by public license practices. Many people have made<br>generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed<br>through that system in reliance on consistent application of that<br>system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing<br>to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot<br>impose that choice.<br><br>This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to<br>be a consequence of the rest of this License.<br>\f<br> 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in<br>certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the<br>original copyright holder who places the Program under this License<br>may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding<br>those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among<br>countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates<br>the limitation as if written in the body of this License.<br><br> 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions<br>of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will<br>be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to<br>address new problems or concerns.<br><br>Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program<br>specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any<br>later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions<br>either of that version or of any later version published by the Free<br>Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of<br>this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software<br>Foundation.<br><br> 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free<br>programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author<br>to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free<br>Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes<br>make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals<br>of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and<br>of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.<br><br> NO WARRANTY<br><br> 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY<br>FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN<br>OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES<br>PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED<br>OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF<br>MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS<br>TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE<br>PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,<br>REPAIR OR CORRECTION.<br><br> 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING<br>WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR<br>REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,<br>INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING<br>OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED<br>TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY<br>YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER<br>PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE<br>POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.<br><br> END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS<br></pre>
+ <pre> GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE<br /> Version 2, June 1991<br /><br /> Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.<br /> 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA<br /> Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies<br /> of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.<br /><br /> Preamble<br /><br /> The licenses for most software are designed to take away your<br />freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public<br />License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free<br />software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This<br />General Public License applies to most of the Free Software<br />Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to<br />using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by<br />the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to<br />your programs, too.<br /><br /> When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not<br />price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you<br />have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for<br />this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it<br />if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it<br />in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.<br /><br /> To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid<br />anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.<br />These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you<br />distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.<br /><br /> For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether<br />gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that<br />you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the<br />source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their<br />rights.<br /><br /> We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and<br />(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,<br />distribute and/or modify the software.<br /><br /> Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain<br />that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free<br />software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we<br />want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so<br />that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original<br />authors' reputations.<br /><br /> Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software<br />patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free<br />program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the<br />program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any<br />patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.<br /><br /> The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and<br />modification follow.<br />\f<br /> GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE<br /> TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION<br /><br /> 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains<br />a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed<br />under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,<br />refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"<br />means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:<br />that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,<br />either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another<br />language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in<br />the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".<br /><br />Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not<br />covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of<br />running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program<br />is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the<br />Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).<br />Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.<br /><br /> 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's<br />source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you<br />conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate<br />copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the<br />notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;<br />and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License<br />along with the Program.<br /><br />You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and<br />you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.<br /><br /> 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion<br />of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and<br />distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1<br />above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:<br /><br /> a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices<br /> stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.<br /><br /> b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in<br /> whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any<br /> part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third<br /> parties under the terms of this License.<br /><br /> c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively<br /> when run, you must cause it, when started running for such<br /> interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an<br /> announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a<br /> notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide<br /> a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under<br /> these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this<br /> License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but<br /> does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on<br /> the Program is not required to print an announcement.)<br />\f<br />These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If<br />identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,<br />and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in<br />themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those<br />sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you<br />distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based<br />on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of<br />this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the<br />entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.<br /><br />Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest<br />your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to<br />exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or<br />collective works based on the Program.<br /><br />In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program<br />with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of<br />a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under<br />the scope of this License.<br /><br /> 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,<br />under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of<br />Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:<br /><br /> a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable<br /> source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections<br /> 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,<br /><br /> b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three<br /> years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your<br /> cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete<br /> machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be<br /> distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium<br /> customarily used for software interchange; or,<br /><br /> c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer<br /> to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is<br /> allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you<br /> received the program in object code or executable form with such<br /> an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)<br /><br />The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for<br />making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source<br />code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any<br />associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to<br />control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a<br />special exception, the source code distributed need not include<br />anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary<br />form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the<br />operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component<br />itself accompanies the executable.<br /><br />If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering<br />access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent<br />access to copy the source code from the same place counts as<br />distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not<br />compelled to copy the source along with the object code.<br />\f<br /> 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program<br />except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt<br />otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is<br />void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.<br />However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under<br />this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such<br />parties remain in full compliance.<br /><br /> 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not<br />signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or<br />distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are<br />prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by<br />modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the<br />Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and<br />all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying<br />the Program or works based on it.<br /><br /> 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the<br />Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the<br />original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to<br />these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further<br />restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.<br />You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to<br />this License.<br /><br /> 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent<br />infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),<br />conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or<br />otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not<br />excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot<br />distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this<br />License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you<br />may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent<br />license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by<br />all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then<br />the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to<br />refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.<br /><br />If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under<br />any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to<br />apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other<br />circumstances.<br /><br />It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any<br />patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any<br />such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the<br />integrity of the free software distribution system, which is<br />implemented by public license practices. Many people have made<br />generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed<br />through that system in reliance on consistent application of that<br />system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing<br />to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot<br />impose that choice.<br /><br />This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to<br />be a consequence of the rest of this License.<br />\f<br /> 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in<br />certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the<br />original copyright holder who places the Program under this License<br />may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding<br />those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among<br />countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates<br />the limitation as if written in the body of this License.<br /><br /> 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions<br />of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will<br />be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to<br />address new problems or concerns.<br /><br />Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program<br />specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any<br />later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions<br />either of that version or of any later version published by the Free<br />Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of<br />this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software<br />Foundation.<br /><br /> 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free<br />programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author<br />to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free<br />Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes<br />make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals<br />of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and<br />of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.<br /><br /> NO WARRANTY<br /><br /> 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY<br />FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN<br />OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES<br />PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED<br />OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF<br />MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS<br />TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE<br />PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,<br />REPAIR OR CORRECTION.<br /><br /> 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING<br />WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR<br />REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,<br />INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING<br />OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED<br />TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY<br />YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER<br />PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE<br />POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.<br /><br /> END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS<br /></pre>
</blockquote>
<p class="normaltext"><a href="http://moodle.org/docs/">User-contributed documentation</a>
- this page lists documentation contributed by Moodle users</p>
<p align="center" class="normaltext"> </p>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<p align="center"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<p align="center"><font size="1">Version: $Id$</font></p>
<blockquote>
<p>The design and development of Moodle is guided by a particular philosophy of learning, a way of thinking that you may see referred to in shorthand as a "<em>social constructionist pedagogy</em>". (Some of you scientists may already be thinking "soft education mumbo jumbo" and reaching for your mouse, but please read on - this is useful for every subject area!)</p>
<p>This page tries to explain in simple terms what that phrase means by unpacking <strong>four main concepts</strong> behind it. Note that each of these is summarising one view of an immense amount of diverse research so these definitions may seem thin if you have read about these before.</p>
- <p>If these concepts are completely new to you then it is likely that these ideas will be hard to understand at first - all I can recommend is that you read it carefully, while thinking about your own experiences of trying to learn something.<br>
+ <p>If these concepts are completely new to you then it is likely that these ideas will be hard to understand at first - all I can recommend is that you read it carefully, while thinking about your own experiences of trying to learn something.<br />
</p>
<h3>1. Constructivism</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>This point of view maintains that people actively <strong>construct</strong> new knowledge as they interact with their environment. </p>
<p>Everything you read, see, hear, feel, and touch is tested against your prior knowledge and if it is viable within your mental world, may form new knowledge you carry with you. Knowledge is strengthened if you can use it successfully in your wider environment. You are not just a memory bank passively absorbing information, nor can knowledge be "transmitted" to you just by reading something or listening to someone.</p>
- <p>This is not to say you can't learn anything from reading a web page or watching a lecture, obviously you can, it's just pointing out that there is more interpretation going on than a transfer of information from one brain to another.<br>
+ <p>This is not to say you can't learn anything from reading a web page or watching a lecture, obviously you can, it's just pointing out that there is more interpretation going on than a transfer of information from one brain to another.<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<h3>2. Constructionism</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>Constructionism asserts that learning is particularly effective when constructing something for others to experience. This can be anything from a spoken sentence or an internet posting, to more complex artifacts like a painting, a house or a software package.</p>
- <p>For example, you might read this page several times and still forget it by tomorrow - but if you were to try and explain these ideas to someone else in your own words, or produce a slideshow that explained these concepts, then I can guarantee you'd have a better understanding that is more integrated into your own ideas. This is why people take notes during lectures, even if they never read the notes again.<br>
+ <p>For example, you might read this page several times and still forget it by tomorrow - but if you were to try and explain these ideas to someone else in your own words, or produce a slideshow that explained these concepts, then I can guarantee you'd have a better understanding that is more integrated into your own ideas. This is why people take notes during lectures, even if they never read the notes again.<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<h3>3. Social Constructivism</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>This extends the above ideas into a social group constructing things for one another, collaboratively creating a small culture of shared artifacts with shared meanings. When one is immersed within a culture like this, one is learning all the time about how to be a part of that culture, on many levels.</p>
- <p>A very simple example is an object like a cup. The object can be used for many things, but its shape does suggest some "knowledge" about carrying liquids. A more complex example is an online course - not only do the "shapes" of the software tools indicate certain things about the way online courses should work, but the activities and texts produced within the group as a whole will help shape how each person behaves within that group.<br>
+ <p>A very simple example is an object like a cup. The object can be used for many things, but its shape does suggest some "knowledge" about carrying liquids. A more complex example is an online course - not only do the "shapes" of the software tools indicate certain things about the way online courses should work, but the activities and texts produced within the group as a whole will help shape how each person behaves within that group.<br />
</p>
</blockquote>
<h3>4. Connected and Separate</h3>
<p>This idea looks deeper into the motivations of individuals within a discussion. <strong>Separate</strong> behaviour is when someone tries to remain 'objective' and 'factual', and tends to defend their own ideas using logic to find holes in their opponent's ideas. <strong>Connected</strong> behaviour is a more empathic approach that accepts subjectivity, trying to listen and ask questions in an effort to understand the other point of view. <strong>Constructed</strong> behaviour is when a person is sensitive to both of these approaches and is able to choose either of them as appropriate to the current situation.</p>
<p>In general, a healthy amount of connected behaviour within a learning community is a very powerful stimulant for learning, not only bringing people closer together but promoting deeper reflection and re-examination of their existing beliefs.</p>
</blockquote>
- <hr>
+ <hr />
<p>Once you are thinking about all these issues, it helps you to focus on the experiences that would be best for learning from the learner's point of view, rather than just publishing and assessing the information you think they need to know. It can also help you realise how each participant in a course can be a teacher as well as a learner. Your job as a 'teacher' can change from being 'the source of knowledge' to being an influencer and role model of class culture, connecting with students in a personal way that addresses their own learning needs, and moderating discussions and activities in a way that collectively leads students towards the learning goals of the class.</p>
<p>Obviously Moodle doesn't force this style of behaviour, but this is what it is best at supporting. In future, as the technical infrastructure of Moodle stabilises, further improvements in pedagogical support will be a major direction for Moodle development.</p>
</blockquote>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1">Version: $Id$</font></p>
</body>
</dd>
</dl>
</ul>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<h3> New in Moodle 1.1.1 (10 September, 2003):</h3>
<ul>
<dl>
</dd>
</dl>
</ul>
-<hr>
+<hr />
</dl>
<dd> </dd>
</ul>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<h3> New in Moodle 1.0.9 (29th May, 2003) :</h3>
<ul>
</dd>
</dl>
</ul>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<p>Older releases can be seen in the <a href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=1">Moodle.org announcement forum</a>.
page on which you can view each file (and how late or early it is), and then
record a grade and a comment. Half an hour after you grade any particular
student, Moodle will automatically email that student a notification. </dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Choice</strong></dt>
<dd>A choice activity is very simple - you ask a question and specify a choice
of responses. Students can make their choice, and you have a report screen
where you can see the results. I use it to gather research consent from
my students, but you could use it for quick polls or class votes.</dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Forum</strong></dt>
<dd>This module is by far the most important - it is here that discussion
takes place. When you add a new forum, yu will presented with a choice of
different types - a simple single-topic discussion, a free-for-all general
forum, or a one-discussion-thread-per-user.</dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Journal</strong></dt>
<dd>Each journal activity is an entry in the whole course journal. For each
one you can specify an open-ended question that guides what students write,
will receive an automatic email informing them of your feedback. Journals
are not designed to be continually added to - if you need to do that then
add more journal activities.</dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Resource</strong></dt>
<dd>Resources are the content of your course. Each resource can be any file
you have uploaded or can point to using a URL. You can also maintain simple
text-based pages by typing them directly into a form.</dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Quiz</strong></dt>
<dd>This module allows you to design and set quiz tests, consisting of multiple
choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These questions are kept
courses. Quizzes can allow multiple attempts. Each attempt is automatically
marked, and the teacher can choose whether to give feedback or to show correct
answers. This module includes grading facilities. </dd>
- <br>
- <br>
+ <br />
+ <br />
<dt><strong>Survey</strong></dt>
<dd>The survey module provides a number of predefined survey instruments that
are useful in evaluating and understanding your class. Currently they include
in the course as a diagnostic tool and at the end of the course as an evaluation
tool (I use one every week in my courses).</dd>
</dl>
- <br>
+ <br />
<p>After adding your activities you can move them up and down in your course
layout by clicking on the little arrow icons (<img src="../pix/t/up.gif" width="9" height="10">
<img src="../pix/t/down.gif" width="9" height="10">) next to each one. You
local site administrator.</p>
<p>If you have some great ideas for improvements to Moodle, or even some good
stories, come over to <a href="http://moodle.org/" target="_top">moodle.org</a>
- and join us in the course called "<a href="http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5" target=_top >Using
+ and join us in the course called "<a href="http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5" target="_top" >Using
Moodle</a>". We'd love to hear from you, and you can help Moodle improve.</p>
<p>If you want to contribute to coding new modules, or writing documentation,
or papers, contact me: <a href="http://moodle.org/user/view.php?id=1&course=1" target="_top">Martin
Dougiamas</a> or browse the "bug tracker" site for Moodle, at <a href="http://moodle.org/bugs/" target="_top">moodle.org/bugs</a></p>
<p>Finally, remember to use the help icons - here is an <a target="helpwindow" href="../help.php?file=index.html">index of all the help files in Moodle</a>.</p>
<p align="center">Thanks for using Moodle - and good luck with your teaching!</p>
- <hr>
+ <hr />
<p> </p>
</blockquote>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<li><strong>help</strong>: containing the context-sensitive help files that pop-up when you click the help icons throughout Moodle
-</li><li><strong>docs</strong>: containing the basic documentation pages (such as this one!)<br>
+</li><li><strong>docs</strong>: containing the basic documentation pages (such as this one!)<br />
</li>
</ul>
in the lang directory using the 2-letter code for your language. You
can find these standard codes in lib/languages.php. If you are making a
local variation of another language use the code of that language with
-an underscore and a meaningful two letter extension (e.g. <span style="font-style: italic;">pt </span>for Portuguese and <span style="font-style: italic;">pt_br</span> for Brasilian variation of the Portuguese language pack). If you are making a Unicode version add <span style="font-weight: bold;">_utf8</span> at the end (eg <span style="font-style: italic;">sr_utf8</span>).<br>
+an underscore and a meaningful two letter extension (e.g. <span style="font-style: italic;">pt </span>for Portuguese and <span style="font-style: italic;">pt_br</span> for Brasilian variation of the Portuguese language pack). If you are making a Unicode version add <span style="font-weight: bold;">_utf8</span> at the end (eg <span style="font-style: italic;">sr_utf8</span>).<br />
</p>
<p style="margin-left: 40px;">Next, copy the moodle.php from another
language into your new directory. The one from the "en" folder is
usually best but it doesn't really matter as you are going to rewrite
-it anyway.<br>
+it anyway.<br />
</p>
-<h3 style="margin-left: 40px;">Making small customisations<br>
+<h3 style="margin-left: 40px;">Making small customisations<br />
</h3>
-<p style="margin-left: 80px;">If you just want to change a few things in the interface to suit your own site better, <span style="font-weight: bold;">don't start editing one of the standard language packs</span>. If you do then your changes will be overwritten next time you upgrade to a new Moodle.<br>
+<p style="margin-left: 80px;">If you just want to change a few things in the interface to suit your own site better, <span style="font-weight: bold;">don't start editing one of the standard language packs</span>. If you do then your changes will be overwritten next time you upgrade to a new Moodle.<br />
</p>
<p style="margin-left: 80px;">Instead, use the instructions above for
making a brand new language pack, and set the parent language (in
example, a good name for a local english version would be "<span style="font-style: italic;">en_local</span>", and the parent language would be "<span style="font-style: italic;">en</span>" or "<span style="font-style: italic;">en_us</span>".</p>
<p style="margin-left: 80px;">Note that for everyone on your site to
see this new pack you have to select it as the site language and
-restrict the available languages on <span style="font-weight: bold;">Admin >> Configuration >> Variables</span>.<br>
-<br>
+restrict the available languages on <span style="font-weight: bold;">Admin >> Configuration >> Variables</span>.<br />
+<br />
</p>
-<h3 style="margin-left: 40px;">Translating the Moodle interface language files (the "string" files)<br>
+<h3 style="margin-left: 40px;">Translating the Moodle interface language files (the "string" files)<br />
</h3>
<li>It's OK to leave strings empty - Moodle will simply use the
parent language for that string instead. You can define the parent
language in moodle.php, otherwise English is always used by default. </li>
- <li>A quick way to see all the missing strings is by using the button to "Check for missing strings".<br>
- <br>
+ <li>A quick way to see all the missing strings is by using the button to "Check for missing strings".<br />
+ <br />
</li>
<p style="margin-left: 40px;">Sharing your translation with Moodle will
ensure that you help other people who speak your language.
-Your interface language will be available in future versions of Moodle.<br>
+Your interface language will be available in future versions of Moodle.<br />
</p>
-<p style="margin-left: 40px;">Simply archive your whole new language directory as a <span style="font-weight: bold;">zip</span> file and email it to <a href="mailto:tra%6es%6ca%74%69o%6e%40%6d%6f%6f%64%6c%65.org">translation@moodle.org</a>.<br>
+<p style="margin-left: 40px;">Simply archive your whole new language directory as a <span style="font-weight: bold;">zip</span> file and email it to <a href="mailto:tra%6es%6ca%74%69o%6e%40%6d%6f%6f%64%6c%65.org">translation@moodle.org</a>.<br />
</p>
-<p style="margin-left: 40px;">We will get back to you with further details.<br>
+<p style="margin-left: 40px;">We will get back to you with further details.<br />
</p>
<p> </p>
-<h2>Maintenance of a standard language pack<br>
+<h2>Maintenance of a standard language pack<br />
</h2>
</p>
<p style="margin-left: 40px;">Finally, to keep in touch with changes in the project on a day-to-day basis it is a very good idea to subscribe to the <a href="http://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=30935" target="_top">CVS mailing list</a>. This helps to keep your
-translation as close to the English text as possible.<br>
+translation as close to the English text as possible.<br />
</p>
-<p style="margin-left: 40px;"><br>
+<p style="margin-left: 40px;"><br />
</p>
<p align="CENTER"><font size="1"><a href="." target="_top">Moodle Documentation</a></font></p>
<blockquote>
<p>Make a separate copy of these files before the upgrade, so that you can
retrieve your config.php and any modules you have added like themes, languages
- etc<strong><br>
+ etc<strong><br />
</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>2. Your data directory.</strong></p>
<p>This is where uploaded content resides (such as course resources and
student assignments) so it is very important to have a backup of these
files anyway. Sometimes upgrades may move or rename directories within
- your data directory.<strong><br>
+ your data directory.<strong><br />
</strong></p>
</blockquote>
<p><strong>3. Your database</strong></p>
way it to rename the current Moodle directory to something else, then unpack
the new Moodle archive into the old location.</p>
<blockquote>
- <p><font face="Courier New, Courier, mono">mv moodle moodle.backup<br>
+ <p><font face="Courier New, Courier, mono">mv moodle moodle.backup<br />
tar xvzf moodle-1.1.tgz</font></p>
</blockquote>
<p>Next, copy across your config.php and any other plugins such as custom
themes:</p>
<blockquote>
- <p><font face="Courier New, Courier, mono">cp moodle.backup/config.php moodle<br>
+ <p><font face="Courier New, Courier, mono">cp moodle.backup/config.php moodle<br />
cp -pr moodle.backup/theme/mytheme moodle/theme/mytheme</font></p>
</blockquote>
</blockquote>
<h3 class="sectionheading">3. Finishing the upgrade</h3>
<blockquote>
<p>The last step is to trigger the upgrade processes within Moodle.</p>
- <p>To do this just visit <a target=_top href="../admin/index.php">the admin page of your
+ <p>To do this just visit <a target="_top" href="../admin/index.php">the admin page of your
installation</a>.</p>
<blockquote>
<p><font face="Courier New, Courier, mono">http://example.com/moodle/admin</font></p>
<p> </p>
<p> Assuming all goes well (no error messages) then you can start using your new
version of Moodle and enjoy the new features!</p>
- <p>If you have trouble with the upgrade, visit <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/">moodle.org</a>
- and post on the <a target=_top href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28">Installation
+ <p>If you have trouble with the upgrade, visit <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/">moodle.org</a>
+ and post on the <a target="_top" href="http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=28">Installation
Support Forum</a> in the Using Moodle course.</p>
</blockquote>
<p> </p>
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// editor.php - created with Moodle 1.2 (2004032000)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['enrolname'] = 'External Database';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['enrolname'] = 'Flat file';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['enrolname'] = 'Internal Enrolment';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
$string['enrolname'] = 'Paypal';
$string['description'] = 'The Paypal module allows you to set up paid courses. If the cost for any course is zero, then students are not asked to pay for entry. There is a site-wide cost that you set here as a default for the whole site and then a course setting that you can set for each course individually. The course cost overrides the site cost.';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// error.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003122600)
$string['coursegroupunknown'] = 'Course corresponding to group $a not specified';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// exercise.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['absent'] = "Absent";
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// forum.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['openmode2'] = 'Discussions and replies are allowed';
$string['parent'] = 'Show parent';
$string['parentofthispost'] = 'Parent of this post';
-$string['postadded'] = 'Your post was successfully added.<P>You have $a to edit it if you want to make any changes.';
+$string['postadded'] = 'Your post was successfully added.<p>You have $a to edit it if you want to make any changes.';
$string['postincontext'] = 'See this post in context';
$string['postmailinfo'] = 'This is a copy of a message posted on the $a website.
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// glossary.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['entryishidden'] = '(this entry is currently hidden)';
$string['entryleveldefaultsettings'] = 'Entry Level Default Settings';
$string['entryusedynalink'] = 'This entry should be automatically linked';
-$string['explainaddentry'] = 'Add a new entry to the current glossary.<br>Concept and definition are mandatory fields.';
+$string['explainaddentry'] = 'Add a new entry to the current glossary.<br />Concept and definition are mandatory fields.';
$string['explainall'] = 'Shows ALL entries on one page';
$string['explainalphabet'] = 'Browse the glossary using this index';
-$string['explainexport'] = 'A file has been generated.<br>Download it and keep it safe. You can import it anytime you wish in this or other course.';
+$string['explainexport'] = 'A file has been generated.<br />Download it and keep it safe. You can import it anytime you wish in this or other course.';
$string['explainimport'] = 'You must specify the file to import and define the criteria of the process.<p>Submit your request and review the results.';
$string['explainspecial'] = 'Shows entries that do not begin with a letter';
$string['exportedentry'] = 'Exported entry';
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Assignment Type</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Assignment Type</b></p>
-<P>There are different types of assignments</P>
+<p>There are different types of assignments</p>
-<P><B>Offline activity</B> - this is useful when the assignment is performed outside
+<p><b>Offline activity</b> - this is useful when the assignment is performed outside
of Moodle. Students can see a description of the assignment, but can't upload files or anything.
Teachers can grade all students though, and students will see notifications of their grades.
-<P><B>Upload a single file</B> - this type of assignment allows all students to upload a
+<p><b>Upload a single file</b> - this type of assignment allows all students to upload a
single file, of any type. This might be a Word processor document, or an image, a
zipped web site, or anything you ask them to submit. Teachers can grade submitted
assignments online.
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/assignment/icon.gif"> <B>Assignments</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>Assignments allow the teacher to specify a task that requires students
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/assignment/icon.gif"> <b>Assignments</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>Assignments allow the teacher to specify a task that requires students
to prepare digital content (any format) and submit it by uploading it
to the server. Typical assignments include essays, projects, reports
- and so on. This module includes grading facilities.</P>
-</UL>
+ and so on. This module includes grading facilities.</p>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Resubmitting assignments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Resubmitting assignments</b></p>
-<P>By default, students cannot resubmit assignments once the teacher has graded them</P>
+<p>By default, students cannot resubmit assignments once the teacher has graded them</p>
-<P>If you turn this option on, then students will be allowed to resubmit assignments
+<p>If you turn this option on, then students will be allowed to resubmit assignments
after they have been graded (for you to re-grade). This may be useful if the
- teacher wants to encourage students to do better work in an iterative process.</P>
+ teacher wants to encourage students to do better work in an iterative process.</p>
-<P>Obviously, this option is not relevant for offline assignments.</P>
+<p>Obviously, this option is not relevant for offline assignments.</p>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/chat/icon.gif"> <B>Chats</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>The Chat module allows participants to have a real-time synchronous
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/chat/icon.gif"> <b>Chats</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>The Chat module allows participants to have a real-time synchronous
discussion via the web. This is a useful way to get a different
understanding of each other and the topic being discussed - the mode
of using a chat room is quite different from the asynchronous forums.
The Chat module contains a number of features for managing and
- reviewing chat discussions.</P>
-</UL>
+ reviewing chat discussions.</p>
+</ul>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/choice/icon.gif"> <B>Choices</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>A choice activity is very simple - the teacher asks a question and specifies a
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/choice/icon.gif"> <b>Choices</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>A choice activity is very simple - the teacher asks a question and specifies a
choice of multiple responses. It can be useful as a quick poll to
stimulate thinking about a topic; to allow the class to vote on
a direction for the course; or to gather research consent.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Choice options</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Choice options</b></p>
-<P>Here is where you specify the options that participants
+<p>Here is where you specify the options that participants
have to choose from.
-<P>You can fill in any number of these: it's OK to leave some blank
+<p>You can fill in any number of these: it's OK to leave some blank
if you don't need the full 6 options.
<p align="center"><b>Restrict times</b></p>
-<P>This setting allows you to define a time window within which
+<p>This setting allows you to define a time window within which
participants are allowed to make a choice.</p>
<p>To set an open-ended close date just set the time very far in the future.</p>
<p align="center"><b>Course availability</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to "hide" your course
+<p>This option allows you to "hide" your course
completely.</p>
<p>It will not appear on any course listings, except to
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course Categories</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course Categories</b></p>
-<P>Your Moodle administrator may have set up several
+<p>Your Moodle administrator may have set up several
course categories.
-<P>For example, "Science", "Humanities", "Public Health" etc
+<p>For example, "Science", "Humanities", "Public Health" etc
-<P>Choose the one most applicable for your course. This
+<p>Choose the one most applicable for your course. This
choice will affect where your course is displayed on the
course listing and may make it easier for students to
find your course.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Moodle course formats</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Moodle course formats</b></p>
-<P><B>Weekly format</B></P>
-<UL>
+<p><b>Weekly format</b></p>
+<ul>
The course is organised week by week, with a clear start date and a finish date.
Each week consists of activities. Some of them, like journals, may have
"open windows" of, say, two weeks after which they become unavailable.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Topics format</B></P>
-<UL>
+<p><b>Topics format</b></p>
+<ul>
Very similar to the weekly format, except that each "week" is called a topic.
A "topic" is not restricted to any time limit. You don't need to specify any
dates.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Social format</B></P>
-<UL>
+<p><b>Social format</b></p>
+<ul>
This format is oriented around one main forum, the Social forum, which appears
listed on the main page. It is useful for situations that are more freeform.
They may not even be courses. For example, it could be used as a departmental
notice board.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course Full name</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course Full name</b></p>
-<P>The full name of the course is displayed at the top of the screen and in the course listings.</P>
+<p>The full name of the course is displayed at the top of the screen and in the course listings.</p>
<p align="center"><b>Grades</b></p>
-<P>Many of the activities allow grades to be set.</p>
+<p>Many of the activities allow grades to be set.</p>
<p>By default, the results of all grades within the
course can be seen in the Grades page, available
<p align="center"><b>Course hidden sections</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course
+<p>This option allows you to decide how the hidden sections in your course
are displayed to students.</p>
<p>By default, a small area is shown (in collapsed form, usually gray) to
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course ID Number</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course ID Number</b></p>
-<P>The ID number of a course is only used when matching this course against
+<p>The ID number of a course is only used when matching this course against
external systems - it is never displayed within Moodle. If you have an
official code name for this course then use it here ... otherwise you can
leave it blank.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course News Items</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course News Items</b></p>
-<P>A special forum called "News" appears in the
+<p>A special forum called "News" appears in the
"weekly" and "topics" course formats. It's
a good place to post notices for all students
to see. (By default, all students are subscribed
to this forum, and will receive your notices by
email.)
-<P>This setting determines how many recent items
+<p>This setting determines how many recent items
appear on your course home page, in a news box
down the right-hand side.
-<P>If you set it to "0 news items" then the news
+<p>If you set it to "0 news items" then the news
box won't even appear.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course Number of Weeks/Topics</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course Number of Weeks/Topics</b></p>
-<P>This setting is only used by the 'weekly' and 'topics'
+<p>This setting is only used by the 'weekly' and 'topics'
course formats.
-<P>In the 'weekly' format, it specifies the number of weeks
+<p>In the 'weekly' format, it specifies the number of weeks
that the course will run for, starting from the
course starting date.
-<P>In the 'topics' format, it specifies the number of topics
+<p>In the 'topics' format, it specifies the number of topics
in the course.
-<P>Both of these translate to the number of "boxes" down the
+<p>Both of these translate to the number of "boxes" down the
middle of the course page.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Recent Activity</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Recent Activity</b></p>
-<P>Moodle can display "recent activity" on the course home page.
+<p>Moodle can display "recent activity" on the course home page.
-<P>This shows the everything that has happened in the course since
+<p>This shows the everything that has happened in the course since
the last time the viewer logged in to the course, including
new posts, new users, submitted journals etc.
-<P>It is highly recommended you leave this feature enabled in
+<p>It is highly recommended you leave this feature enabled in
your courses, as it helps give a sense of activity in the course.
Knowing what everyone else is doing also helps to promote a
collaborative atmosphere in the class.
-<P>You might want to disable this feature for extremely large or
+<p>You might want to disable this feature for extremely large or
heavily used courses, as it may slow down the display of
the course page.
<p align="center"><b>Activity Reports</b></p>
-<P>Activity reports are available for each participant
+<p>Activity reports are available for each participant
that show their activity in the current course. As
well as listings of their contributions, these
reports include detailed access logs.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course short name</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course short name</b></p>
-<P>Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as
+<p>Many institutions have a shorthand way of referring to a course, such as
BP102 or COMMS. Even you don't already have such a name for your course,
make one up here. It will be used in several places where the long name
- isn't appropriate (such us in the subject line of email).</P>
+ isn't appropriate (such us in the subject line of email).</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course Start Date</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course Start Date</b></p>
-<P>This is where you specify the starting time of the
+<p>This is where you specify the starting time of the
course (in your own timezone).
-<P>If you are using a 'weekly' course format, this will
+<p>If you are using a 'weekly' course format, this will
affect the display of the weeks. The first week will
start on the date you set here.
-<P>This setting will not affect courses using the
+<p>This setting will not affect courses using the
'social' or 'topics' formats.
-<P>However, one place this setting will be affect is
+<p>However, one place this setting will be affect is
the display of logs, which use this date as the earliest
possible date you can display.
-<P>In general, if your course does have a real starting date
+<p>In general, if your course does have a real starting date
then it makes sense to set this date to that, no matter
what course formats you are using.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course upload size</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course upload size</b></p>
-<P>This setting defines the largest size of file that can be
+<p>This setting defines the largest size of file that can be
uploaded by students in this course, limited by the site
wide setting created by the administrator.
-<P>It is possible to further restrict this size through
+<p>It is possible to further restrict this size through
settings within each activity module.
-<p>Dialogues</p>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=addsubject.html">Add Subject to a Dialogue</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=closedialogue.html">Close a Dialogue</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=deleteafter.html">Delete Dialogues</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=dialoguetype.html">Dialogue Types</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=info.html">More Information</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=maildefault.html">Mail Default</a> \r
- <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=multiple.html">Multiple Dialogues</a> \r
-</ul>\r
+<p>Dialogues</p>
+
+<ul>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=addsubject.html">Add Subject to a Dialogue</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=closedialogue.html">Close a Dialogue</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=deleteafter.html">Delete Dialogues</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=dialoguetype.html">Dialogue Types</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=info.html">More Information</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=maildefault.html">Mail Default</a>
+ <li><a href="help.php?module=dialogue&file=multiple.html">Multiple Dialogues</a>
+</ul>
+
-<img valign=absmiddle src="<?php echo $cfg->wwwroot?>/mod/dialogue/icon.gif"> <b>Dialogues</b></p>
+<img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $cfg->wwwroot?>/mod/dialogue/icon.gif"> <b>Dialogues</b></p>
<p>This module provides a simple communication method between pairs of users.
A teacher can open an dialogue with a student, a student can open
-<p><img valign=absmiddle src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/dialogue/icon.gif"> <b>Dialogues</b></p>
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/dialogue/icon.gif"> <b>Dialogues</b></p>
<ul>
<p>This module provides a simple communication method between pairs of users.
A teacher can open an dialogue with a student, a student can open
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Using Smilies (emoticons)</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Using Smilies (emoticons)</b></p>
<table border="1" align="center">
<tr valign="top">
</table>
</table>
-<P>When writing online, it can sometimes difficult to express emotion with plain text.
+<p>When writing online, it can sometimes difficult to express emotion with plain text.
These little icons can help.
-<P>To insert these icons in your text: just click the icon above, or type the associated text code directly in your text.</P>
+<p>To insert these icons in your text: just click the icon above, or type the associated text code directly in your text.</p>
-<P>Note that the codes themselves are like little pictures - just turn your head to the left when looking at them</P>
+<p>Note that the codes themselves are like little pictures - just turn your head to the left when looking at them</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Course Enrolment Key</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Course Enrolment Key</b></p>
-<P>A course enrolment key is what keeps unwanted people
+<p>A course enrolment key is what keeps unwanted people
out of your course.
-<P>If you leave this blank, then anyone who has created
+<p>If you leave this blank, then anyone who has created
a Moodle username on this site will be able to enrol
in your course simply by going in to it.
-<P>If you put something here, then students who are trying
+<p>If you put something here, then students who are trying
to get in for the FIRST TIME ONLY will be asked to supply
this word or phrase.
-<P>The idea is that you will supply the key to authorised
+<p>The idea is that you will supply the key to authorised
people using another means like private email, snail mail,
on the phone or even verbally in a face to face class.
-<P>If this password "gets out" and you have unwanted people
+<p>If this password "gets out" and you have unwanted people
enrolling, you can unenrol them (see their user profile page)
and change this key. Any legitimate students who have already
enrolled will not be affected, but the unwanted people won't be
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Administration Page</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Administration Page</b></p>
<p>This page allows the teacher to see the one or more descriptions for the
Exercise, the student assessments and the student submissions. These items
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Assessment Elements</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Assessment Elements</b></p>
-<P>For ease of grading, a Exercise Assessment should have a reasonable
+<p>For ease of grading, a Exercise Assessment should have a reasonable
number of "Assessment Elements". Each element should cover
a particular aspect of the assessment. Typically an assessment will have
something between 5 to 15 elements for comments and grading, the
assignment with only one element is allowed and has a similar assessment
strategy to the standard Moodle Assignment.
-<P>The type of elements dependent on the assignment's grading strategy.
+<p>The type of elements dependent on the assignment's grading strategy.
-<P><B>Not Graded.</B> The elements are descriptions of aspects of the assignment.
+<p><b>Not Graded.</b> The elements are descriptions of aspects of the assignment.
The assessor is asked to comment on each of these aspects. As with all the grading
strategies, there is also an area for general comments.
-<P><B>Accumulative Grading.</B> The elements have the following three features:
-<OL>
-<LI>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
+<p><b>Accumulative Grading.</b> The elements have the following three features:
+<ol>
+<li>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
aspect of the assignment is being assessed. If the assessment is qualatative
it is helpful to give details of what is considered excellent, average
and poor.
-<
LI><p>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
+<
li><p>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
scales. These range from simple Yes/No scales, through multipoint scales to
a full percentage scale. Each element has its own scale which should be choosen
to fit the number of possible variations for that element. Note that the scale
"Very Wet" at one end of the scale and "Dry" at the
other.</p>
-<LI>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
+<li>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
importance when calculating the overall grade of the assignment. Weights can
be assigned negative values, this is an experimental feature.
-</OL>
-<P><B>Error Banded Grading.</B> The elements will normally describe certain items
+</ol>
+<p><b>Error Banded Grading.</b> The elements will normally describe certain items
or aspects which must be present in the assignment. The assessment is made on
the present or absence of these items or aspects. The teacher must all set of
grade table which give the suggested grades when all the items are present,
"error count" is a weighted sum of the missing items. The assessor
can always make a minor adjustment to these suggested grades.
-<P><B>Criterion Grading.</B> The elements will give a set of "level"
+<p><b>Criterion Grading.</b> The elements will give a set of "level"
statements which can be used to rank the assignment. The statements may be
cumulative or they may each be self contained. The assessor must decide which
statement best fits each piece of work. The teacher must also relate each
criterion statement with a suggested grade. These should normally be in order.
- The assessor can make a minor adjustment to these suggested grades.</P>
+ The assessor can make a minor adjustment to these suggested grades.</p>
-<P><B>Rubric Grading.</B> This is similar to Criterion Grading but there is more
+<p><b>Rubric Grading.</b> This is similar to Criterion Grading but there is more
than one criteria. The number of criteria is given in the assignment
parameters. Within each criterion there can be up to five "level"
statements. In a given assignment the number of levels can vary from criterion
have three, up to five levels. The criteria can be weighted. The levels are
scored 0, 1, 2, up to 4. The grade for the assessment is a weighted sum of
these scores.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>The Final Grades</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>The Final Grades</b></p>
<p>The table on this screen lists the overall grades and their breakdown. The first grade is
the grade for the (inital) assessment. This is added to the grades given to each
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading of Assignments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading of Assignments</b></p>
<p>In this Exercise the same Assessment Form is used by Students and Teachers
to assess the work produced. The form is used at different stages of the
-<p align=center><b>Grade of Student Assessments</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Grade of Student Assessments</b></p>
<p>This is the maximum grade given to the assessments make by students of their
own work. That is, the grade for their self assessments. The actual grades
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading Strategy</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading Strategy</b></p>
-<P>An Exercise assignment is quite flexible in the type of grading scheme used. This can be:
+<p>An Exercise assignment is quite flexible in the type of grading scheme used. This can be:
-<OL>
-<LI><B>No grading:</B> In this type of assignment the teacher is not
+<ol>
+<li><b>No grading:</b> In this type of assignment the teacher is not
interested in quantative assessment from the students at all. The students
make comments of the pieces of works but do not grade them. The teacher,
however, can, if desired, grade the student comments. These
If the teacher does not grade the student assessments then the assignment
does not have any final grades.
-<LI><B>Accumulative grading:</B> This is the default type of grading.
+<li><b>Accumulative grading:</b> This is the default type of grading.
In this type of assignment the grade of each
assessment is made up of a number of "assessment elements".
Each element should cover
exercise assignment with only one element is allowed and has a similar assessment
strategy to the standard Moodle Assignment.
-<P>Elements have the following three features:
-<OL>
-<LI>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
+<p>Elements have the following three features:
+<ol>
+<li>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
aspect of the assignment is being assessed. If the assessment is qualatative
it is helpful to give details of what is considered excellent, average
and poor.
-<
LI><p>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
+<
li><p>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
scales. These range from simple Yes/No scales, through multipoint scales to
a full percentage scale. Each element has its own scale which should be choosen
to fit the number of possible variations for that element. Note that the scale
"Very Wet" at one end of the scale and "Dry" at the
other.</p>
-<LI>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
+<li>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
importance when calculating the overall grade of the assignment. This can be
changed by giving the more importance elements a weight greater than one, and
the less important elements a weight below one. Changing the weights does NOT
effect the maximum grade, that value is fixed by the Maximum Grade parameter
of the peer assignment. Weights can be assigned negative values, this is an
experimental feature.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-<LI><B>Error Banded Grading:</B> In this type of assignment the submissions are
+<li><b>Error Banded Grading:</b> In this type of assignment the submissions are
graded on a set of Yes/No scales. The grade is determined by the "Grade
Table " which gives the relationship between the number of
"errors" and the suggested grade. For example an assignment may have six
an assignment with 10 items.The assessor can adjust the suggested grade by up
to 20% either way to give the submission's final grade.
-<LI><B>Criterion Grading:</B> This is simpliest type of assessment to grade (although
+<li><b>Criterion Grading:</b> This is simpliest type of assessment to grade (although
not necessarily the most straightforward to set up). The submissions are
graded against a set of criteria statments. The assessor choses which statement
best fits the piece of work. The grade is determined by a "Criteria
up to five statements. The sets are given individual
weights and the grade is a weighted combination of the scores from each set. There
is <b>no</b> adjustment option in this assessment type.
-</OL>
-</P>
+</ol>
+</p>
-<p align=center><b>League Table</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>League Table</b></p>
<p>This option controls the display of a League Table at the end of the
exercise. If displayed, the league table displays a list of the best pieces
-<p align=center><b>League Table Names</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>League Table Names</b></p>
<p>This option controls whether the student's names are displayed in the League
Table shown at the end of the exercise. By default names are not shown,
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Managing an Exercise Assignment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Managing an Exercise Assignment</b></p>
-<P>An Exercise Assignment is slightly more complex than an ordinary assignment.
+<p>An Exercise Assignment is slightly more complex than an ordinary assignment.
It involves three steps or phases. These are
-<OL>
-<
LI><p><b>Set up Exercise </b> The assessment of the work produced in the
+<ol>
+<
li><p><b>Set up Exercise </b> The assessment of the work produced in the
exercise is made easier if it is broken into a number of assessment ELEMENTS.
This makes the grading of an assignment less
arbitary and gives the students a framework on which to make assessments.
The teacher has the role of setting up the assessment elements thus making a
grading sheet. (See that page for more details.)</p>
- <P>With the assessment elements set up the teacher must submit a
+ <p>With the assessment elements set up the teacher must submit a
Word Document or HTML file which describes the exercise or task to be done
by the students. This file is shown to the students in the second phase of
the exercise. </p>
Word Documents or HTML files, and upload those into the Exercise. Note that
these exercises must be quite similar as the same Assessment Form is used
for all of these variants. The submission of a multiple set of exercises by
- the teacher is optional and for certain assignments may not be appropriate.</P>
+ the teacher is optional and for certain assignments may not be appropriate.</p>
-<
LI><p><b>Allow Students Assessments and Submissions</b> The assignment
+<
li><p><b>Allow Students Assessments and Submissions</b> The assignment
is now opened to the students. If the teacher has set up multiple exercises then
the students see different exercises, otherwise all the students see the same
exercise.</p>
-<IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/exercise/icon.gif"> <B>Exercise</B>
+<img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/exercise/icon.gif"> <b>Exercise</b>
-<UL>
-<P>An Exercise is a simple but powerful assignment. In an exercise the teacher asks the students to do a piece of practical work. It could be writing an essay or a report, preparing a presentation, etc. When the student has done the task they must first self-assess their work before submitting it to the teacher. Once submitted the teacher assesses the piece of work itself. The teacher can give feedback to the student and ask the student to improve the work and re-submit it or not. The final grade is based on how well the student assessed their own work and the work itself.</p>
-</UL>
+<ul>
+<p>An Exercise is a simple but powerful assignment. In an exercise the teacher asks the students to do a piece of practical work. It could be writing an essay or a report, preparing a presentation, etc. When the student has done the task they must first self-assess their work before submitting it to the teacher. Once submitted the teacher assesses the piece of work itself. The teacher can give feedback to the student and ask the student to improve the work and re-submit it or not. The final grade is based on how well the student assessed their own work and the work itself.</p>
+</ul>
-<IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/exercise/icon.gif"> <B>Exercise</B>
+<img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/exercise/icon.gif"> <b>Exercise</b>
-<P>An Exercise is a simple but powerful assignment. In an exercise the teacher
+<p>An Exercise is a simple but powerful assignment. In an exercise the teacher
asks the students to do a piece of practical work. It could be writing an
essay or a report, preparing a presentation, or setting out a spreadsheet,
etc. When the student has done the task they must first self-assess their
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Number of Comments, Elements, Bands, Criteria or Rubrics</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Number of Comments, Elements, Bands, Criteria or Rubrics</b></p>
<p>The number entered here determines how many items will be used in
the assessments. Depending on the type of grading strategy, this number
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Passwords</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Passwords</b></p>
-<P>This field sets the "access" password for this exercise. The
+<p>This field sets the "access" password for this exercise. The
password can be up to 10 characters long. The password can be reset at any
time during the exercise. Whether students are asked for the password to
- enter the exercise is determined by the "Use Password" option.</P>
+ enter the exercise is determined by the "Use Password" option.</p>
-<p align=center><b>Re-grading Student Assessments</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Re-grading Student Assessments</b></p>
<p>This link re-calculates the "Grading grades" of all the student
assessments. Normally it is <b>not</b> necessary to action this
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Submission of Exercise Descriptions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Submission of Exercise Descriptions</b></p>
-<P>The teacher must submit at least one description of the exercise or task.
+<p>The teacher must submit at least one description of the exercise or task.
The description can be held in a Word document or HTML file (or
any other file type that will display satisfactorily in a browser). This file
will be displayed to the students and should contain instructions for them
to successfully complete the exercise.</p>
-<P>It is permissible for the teacher to submit more than one description of
+<p>It is permissible for the teacher to submit more than one description of
the exercise. These will be used at random and different students will see
different versions of the exercise. These variants should be similar as the
same Assessment Form is used to assess the work from these instructions.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Take Ownership of the Exercises</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Take Ownership of the Exercises</b></p>
<p>This link allows the teacher to take ownership of the current set of exercise
submissions. You will need to do this if you have imported an exercise from a
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Use Password</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Use Password</b></p>
-<P>Normal an exercise is open, that is if an Exercise is visible, students can
+<p>Normal an exercise is open, that is if an Exercise is visible, students can
see the contains of the exercise. The availability of an
exercise within the course is normally best controlled through the
Visible/Hide activity feature.</p>
course and each group is set the exercise at different times. The access
password is used to prevent the "second" group of students, say,
from doing the exercise once the exercise has been opened up for the
- "first" group.</P>
+ "first" group.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Allowing new posts</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Allowing new posts</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to restrict students from posting
+<p>This option allows you to restrict students from posting
new content in this forum.
-<P>For most forums you will want to leave students unrestricted
+<p>For most forums you will want to leave students unrestricted
and choose the first option to allow them to start new discussion
topics (threads), and also to post replies within those threads.
-<P>Sometimes, however, you will want to disable this ability. For
+<p>Sometimes, however, you will want to disable this ability. For
example, this is useful for the News forum when you only want
teachers to post new items that appear on the course main page.
In this case you might choose the third option "No discussions, no replies".
-<P>Sometimes you might want to only allow teachers to start new
+<p>Sometimes you might want to only allow teachers to start new
discussions, but still allow students to reply within those
threads (for example within the news forum on the site home page).
In this case you would choose the second option, "No discussions, but
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Attachments for posts</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Attachments for posts</b></p>
-<P>You can optionally attach ONE file from your own computer
+<p>You can optionally attach ONE file from your own computer
to any post in the forums. This file is uploaded to the
server and stored with your post.
-<P>This is useful when you want to share a picture, for example,
+<p>This is useful when you want to share a picture, for example,
or a Word document.
-<P>This file can be of any type, however it is highly recommended
+<p>This file can be of any type, however it is highly recommended
that the file is named using standard 3-letter internet
suffixes such as .doc for a Word document, .jpg or .png
for an image, and so on. This will make it easier for others
to download and view your attachment in their browsers.
-<P>If you re-edit a posting and attach a new file, then any
+<p>If you re-edit a posting and attach a new file, then any
previous attached files for that post will be replaced.
-<P>If you re-edit a posting with an attachment and leave
+<p>If you re-edit a posting with an attachment and leave
this space blank, then the original attachment will be
retained.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Forum Types</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Forum Types</b></p>
-<P>There are several different types of forum to choose from:
+<p>There are several different types of forum to choose from:
-<P><B>A single simple discussion</B> - is just a single topic, all on one page.
+<p><b>A single simple discussion</b> - is just a single topic, all on one page.
Useful for short, focussed discussions.
-<P><B>Standard forum for general use</B> - is an open forum where any one can
+<p><b>Standard forum for general use</b> - is an open forum where any one can
start a new topic at any time. This is the best general-purpose forum.
-<P><B>Each person posts one discussion</B> - Each person can post exactly one
+<p><b>Each person posts one discussion</b> - Each person can post exactly one
new discussion topic (everyone can reply to them though). This is useful when
you want each student to start a discussion about, say, their reflections on
the week's topic, and everyone else responds to these.
-<P>(More development to come in future versions of Moodle)
+<p>(More development to come in future versions of Moodle)
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Maximum attachment size</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Maximum attachment size</b></p>
-<P>Attachments can be limited to a certain size file,
+<p>Attachments can be limited to a certain size file,
chosen by the person who set up the forum.
-<P>Sometimes it is possible to upload a file larger than
+<p>Sometimes it is possible to upload a file larger than
this size, but the file will not be saved on the
server and you might see an error.
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/forum/icon.gif"> <B>Forums</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This activity can be the most important - it is here that most discussion takes place.
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/forum/icon.gif"> <b>Forums</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This activity can be the most important - it is here that most discussion takes place.
Forums can be structured in different ways, and can include peer rating of each posting.
The postings can be viewed in a variety for formats, and can include attachments.
By subscribing to a forum, participants will receive copies of each new posting
in their email. A teacher can impose subscription on everyone if they want to.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-Individual posts can be rated using a scale based on the theory of <strong>separate and connected knowing</strong>.\r
-\r
-This theory may help you to look at human interactions in a new way. It describes two different ways that we can evaluate and learn about the things we see and hear.\r
-\r
-Although each of us may use these two methods in different amounts at different times, it may be useful to imagine two people as examples, one who is a mostly separate knower (Jim) and the other a mostly connected knower (Mary).\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>Jim likes to remain as 'objective' as possible without including his feelings and emotions. When in a discussion with other people who may have different ideas, he likes to defend his own ideas, using logic to find holes in his opponent's ideas. He is critical of new ideas unless they are proven facts from reputable sources such as textbooks, respected teachers or his own direct experience. Jim is a very <strong>separate knower</strong>.\r
- </li>\r
- <li>Mary is more sensitive to other people. She is skilled at empathy and tends to listen and ask questions until she feels she can connect and "understand things from their point of view". She learns by trying to share the experiences that led to the knowledge she finds in other people. When talking to others, she avoids confrontation and will often try to help the other person if she can see a way to do so, using logical suggestions. Mary is a very <strong>connected knower</strong>.</li>\r
-</ul>\r
-Did you notice in these examples that the separate knower is male and the connected knower is female? Some studies have shown that statistically this tends to be the case, however individual people can be anywhere in the spectrum between these two extremes.\r
-\r
-For a collaborative and effective group of learners it may be best if everyone were able to use BOTH ways of knowing.\r
-\r
-In a particular situation like an online forum, a single post by a person may exhibit either of these characteristics, or even both. Someone who is generally very connected may post a very separate-sounding message, and vice versa. The purpose of rating each post using this scale is to:\r
-<blockquote>\r
-a) help you think about these issues when reading other posts\r
-b) provide feedback to each author on how they are being seen by others\r
-</blockquote>\r
-The results are not used towards student assessment in any way, they are just to help improve communication and learning.\r
-<hr>\r
-In case you're interested, here are some references to papers by the authors who originally developed these ideas:\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>Belenky, M.F., Clinchy, B.M., Goldberger, N.R., & Tarule, J.M. (1986). \r
- Women's ways of knowing: the development of self, voice, and mind. New York, \r
- NY: Basic Books.</li>\r
- <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1989a). The development of thoughtfulness in college women: \r
- Integrating reason and care. American Behavioural Scientist, 32(6), 647-657.</li>\r
- <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1989b). On critical thinking & connected knowing. Liberal \r
- education, 75(5), 14-19.</li>\r
- <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1996). Connected and separate knowing; Toward a marriage \r
- of two minds. In N.R. Goldberger, Tarule, J.M., Clinchy, B.M. &</li>\r
- <li>Belenky, M.F. (Eds.), Knowledge, Difference, and Power; Essays inspired \r
- by “Women’s Ways of Knowing” (pp. 205-247). New York, NY: \r
- Basic Books.</li>\r
- <li>Galotti, K. M., Clinchy, B. M., Ainsworth, K., Lavin, B., & Mansfield, \r
- A. F. (1999). A New Way of Assessing Ways of Knowing: The Attitudes Towards \r
- Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS). Sex Roles, 40(9/10), 745-766.</li>\r
- <li>Galotti, K. M., Reimer, R. L., & Drebus, D. W. (2001). Ways of knowing \r
- as learning styles: Learning MAGIC with a partner. Sex Roles, 44(7/8), 419-436. \r
- <br>\r
- </li>\r
-</ul>\r
-\r
+Individual posts can be rated using a scale based on the theory of <strong>separate and connected knowing</strong>.
+
+
+
+This theory may help you to look at human interactions in a new way. It describes two different ways that we can evaluate and learn about the things we see and hear.
+
+
+
+Although each of us may use these two methods in different amounts at different times, it may be useful to imagine two people as examples, one who is a mostly separate knower (Jim) and the other a mostly connected knower (Mary).
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>Jim likes to remain as 'objective' as possible without including his feelings and emotions. When in a discussion with other people who may have different ideas, he likes to defend his own ideas, using logic to find holes in his opponent's ideas. He is critical of new ideas unless they are proven facts from reputable sources such as textbooks, respected teachers or his own direct experience. Jim is a very <strong>separate knower</strong>.
+
+ </li>
+
+ <li>Mary is more sensitive to other people. She is skilled at empathy and tends to listen and ask questions until she feels she can connect and "understand things from their point of view". She learns by trying to share the experiences that led to the knowledge she finds in other people. When talking to others, she avoids confrontation and will often try to help the other person if she can see a way to do so, using logical suggestions. Mary is a very <strong>connected knower</strong>.</li>
+
+</ul>
+
+Did you notice in these examples that the separate knower is male and the connected knower is female? Some studies have shown that statistically this tends to be the case, however individual people can be anywhere in the spectrum between these two extremes.
+
+
+
+For a collaborative and effective group of learners it may be best if everyone were able to use BOTH ways of knowing.
+
+
+
+In a particular situation like an online forum, a single post by a person may exhibit either of these characteristics, or even both. Someone who is generally very connected may post a very separate-sounding message, and vice versa. The purpose of rating each post using this scale is to:
+
+<blockquote>
+
+a) help you think about these issues when reading other posts
+
+b) provide feedback to each author on how they are being seen by others
+
+</blockquote>
+
+The results are not used towards student assessment in any way, they are just to help improve communication and learning.
+
+<hr />
+
+In case you're interested, here are some references to papers by the authors who originally developed these ideas:
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>Belenky, M.F., Clinchy, B.M., Goldberger, N.R., & Tarule, J.M. (1986).
+
+ Women's ways of knowing: the development of self, voice, and mind. New York,
+
+ NY: Basic Books.</li>
+
+ <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1989a). The development of thoughtfulness in college women:
+
+ Integrating reason and care. American Behavioural Scientist, 32(6), 647-657.</li>
+
+ <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1989b). On critical thinking & connected knowing. Liberal
+
+ education, 75(5), 14-19.</li>
+
+ <li>Clinchy, B.M. (1996). Connected and separate knowing; Toward a marriage
+
+ of two minds. In N.R. Goldberger, Tarule, J.M., Clinchy, B.M. &</li>
+
+ <li>Belenky, M.F. (Eds.), Knowledge, Difference, and Power; Essays inspired
+
+ by “Women’s Ways of Knowing” (pp. 205-247). New York, NY:
+
+ Basic Books.</li>
+
+ <li>Galotti, K. M., Clinchy, B. M., Ainsworth, K., Lavin, B., & Mansfield,
+
+ A. F. (1999). A New Way of Assessing Ways of Knowing: The Attitudes Towards
+
+ Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS). Sex Roles, 40(9/10), 745-766.</li>
+
+ <li>Galotti, K. M., Reimer, R. L., & Drebus, D. W. (2001). Ways of knowing
+
+ as learning styles: Learning MAGIC with a partner. Sex Roles, 44(7/8), 419-436.
+
+ <br />
+
+ </li>
+
+</ul>
+
+
+
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Number of RSS recent articles</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Number of RSS recent articles</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to select the number of articles
+<p>This option allows you to select the number of articles
to include in the RSS Feed.
-<P>A number between 5 and 20 should be appropiate for
+<p>A number between 5 and 20 should be appropiate for
most forums. Increase it if the forum is very used.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>RSS feed for this forum</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>RSS feed for this forum</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to enable RSS feeds in this forum.
+<p>This option allows you to enable RSS feeds in this forum.
-<P>You can select between two types of forums:
+<p>You can select between two types of forums:
-<UL>
-<LI><B>Discussions:</B> Using this, generated feeds will include
+<ul>
+<li><b>Discussions:</b> Using this, generated feeds will include
new discussions in the forum with their initial post.
-<LI><B>Posts:</B> Using this, generated feeds will include
+<li><b>Posts:</b> Using this, generated feeds will include
every new post in the forum.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Forum Subscription</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Forum Subscription</b></p>
-<P>When a person is subscribed to a forum it means that
+<p>When a person is subscribed to a forum it means that
they will be sent email copies of every post in that forum
-(posts are sent about <?PHP echo $CFG->maxeditingtime/60 ?> minutes
+(posts are sent about <?php echo $CFG->maxeditingtime/60 ?> minutes
after the post was first written).
-<P>People can usually choose whether or not they want to be
+<p>People can usually choose whether or not they want to be
subscribed to each forum.
-<P>However, if a teacher forces subscription on a particular forum
+<p>However, if a teacher forces subscription on a particular forum
then this choice is taken away and everyone in the class will get
email copies.
-<P>This is especially useful in the News forum and in forums
+<p>This is especially useful in the News forum and in forums
towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has
worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Forum Subscription</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Forum Subscription</b></p>
-<P>When a person is subscribed to a forum it means that
+<p>When a person is subscribed to a forum it means that
they will be sent email copies of every post in that forum
-(posts are sent about <?PHP echo $CFG->maxeditingtime/60 ?> minutes
+(posts are sent about <?php echo $CFG->maxeditingtime/60 ?> minutes
after the post was first written).
-</P>
+</p>
-<P>People can usually choose whether or not they want to be
+<p>People can usually choose whether or not they want to be
subscribed to each forum.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P>However, if you choose to force subscription on a particular forum
+<p>However, if you choose to force subscription on a particular forum
then all course users will be subscribed automatically, even those that
enrol at a later time.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P>This is especially useful in the News forum and in forums
+<p>This is especially useful in the News forum and in forums
towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has
worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).
-</P>
+</p>
<p>If you choose the option "Yes, initially" then all current and future
course users will be subscribed initially but
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Keywords</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Keywords</b></p>
<p>Each entry in the glossary can have an associated list of keywords (or aliases).
-<p align=center><b>Allow duplicated entries</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Allow duplicated entries</b></p>
<p>If you turn this option on, then multiple entries are allowed to
use the same concept name.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Case sensitive matching</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Case sensitive matching</b></p>
-<P>This setting specifies whether matching exact upper and lower case is
+<p>This setting specifies whether matching exact upper and lower case is
necessary when performing automatic linking to these entries.</p>
<p>For example, if this is turned on, then a word like "html" in a forum
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Approved by default</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Approved by default</b></p>
<p>This setting allows the teacher to define what happens to new entries added by students. They can be
automatically made available to everyone, otherwise the teacher will have to approve each one.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Description</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Description</b></p>
-<P>This field allows you to describe the purpose of the glossary, and
+<p>This field allows you to describe the purpose of the glossary, and
to possibly provide instructions or background information, links etc.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Defining the destination of imported entries</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Defining the destination of imported entries</b></p>
-<P>You can specify where you want to import entries to:</p>
+<p>You can specify where you want to import entries to:</p>
<ul>
<li><strong>Current Glossary:</strong> Will append the imported entries to the currently open glossary.</li>
<li><strong>New Glossary:</strong> Will create a new glossary based on the information found in the selected import file and will insert the new entries into it.</li>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Display format</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Display format</b></p>
-<P>This setting specifies the way that each entry will be shown within the glossary. The default formats are:</p>
+<p>This setting specifies the way that each entry will be shown within the glossary. The default formats are:</p>
<blockquote>
<dl>
<dt><b>Simple Dictionary</b>:</dt>
</dl>
</blockquote>
-<hr>
+<hr />
<p>Moodle Administrators can create new formats following the instructions in
<b>mod/glossary/formats/README.txt</b>.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Edit always</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Edit always</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to decide if students can edit their entries
+<p>This option allows you to decide if students can edit their entries
at any time.
-<P>You can select:
+<p>You can select:
-<UL>
-<LI><B>Yes:</B> Entries are always editable.
+<ul>
+<li><b>Yes:</b> Entries are always editable.
-<LI><B>No:</B> Entries are editable for configured editing time.
-</UL>
+<li><b>No:</b> Entries are editable for configured editing time.
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Defining the number of entries shown per page</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Defining the number of entries shown per page</b></p>
-<P>The glossary can be configured to restrict the number of entries shown per page.</p>
+<p>The glossary can be configured to restrict the number of entries shown per page.</p>
<p>If you have a large number of automatically-linked entries you should set this number lower to prevent long loading times.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>File to import</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>File to import</b></p>
-<P>Select the XML file on your own computer which contains the entries to import.</p>
+<p>Select the XML file on your own computer which contains the entries to import.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Whole words matching</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Whole words matching</b></p>
<p>If automatic linking is enabled, then turning this setting on will force only
whole words to be linked.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Defining a global glossary</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Defining a global glossary</b></p>
<p>Administrators can define a glossary to be global.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Importing categories</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing categories</b></p>
-<P>By default, all the entries will be imported. You can specify if you want the categories to be imported as well (and the new entries will be assigned to these).</p>
+<p>By default, all the entries will be imported. You can specify if you want the categories to be imported as well (and the new entries will be assigned to these).</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Automatically linking categories</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Automatically linking categories</b></p>
-<P>You can specify if you want the categories to be automatically linked or not.</p>
+<p>You can specify if you want the categories to be automatically linked or not.</p>
<p>Note: Categories are linked based on a case sensitive, whole match.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Defining the main glossary of the course</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Defining the main glossary of the course</b></p>
-<P>The glossary system allows you to export entries from any secondary glossary to the main one of the course.</p>
+<p>The glossary system allows you to export entries from any secondary glossary to the main one of the course.</p>
<p>In order to do this, you should specify which glossary is the main one.</p>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/glossary/icon.gif"> <B>Glossary</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This activity allows participants to create and maintain a list of definitions, like a dictionary.
-<P>The entries can be searched or browsed in many different formats.
-<P>The glossary also allows teachers to export entries from one glossary to another (the main one) within the same course.
-<P>Finally, it is possible to automatically create links to these entries from throughout the course.</p>
-</UL>
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/glossary/icon.gif"> <b>Glossary</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This activity allows participants to create and maintain a list of definitions, like a dictionary.
+<p>The entries can be searched or browsed in many different formats.
+<p>The glossary also allows teachers to export entries from one glossary to another (the main one) within the same course.
+<p>Finally, it is possible to automatically create links to these entries from throughout the course.</p>
+</ul>
<p align="center"><b>Number of RSS recent articles</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to select the number of articles
+<p>This option allows you to select the number of articles
to include in the RSS Feed.
-<P>A number between 5 and 20 would be normal for most glossaries.
+<p>A number between 5 and 20 would be normal for most glossaries.
Increase the number if the glossary is updated frequently.
<p align="center"><b>RSS feed for this glossary</b></p>
-<P>This option allows you to enable RSS feeds from this glossary.
+<p>This option allows you to enable RSS feeds from this glossary.
-<P>You can select between two types of feeds:
+<p>You can select between two types of feeds:
-<UL>
-<LI><B>With author:</B> Generated feeds will include
+<ul>
+<li><b>With author:</b> Generated feeds will include
the name of the author in every article.
-<LI><B>Without author:</B> Generated feeds won't include
+<li><b>Without author:</b> Generated feeds won't include
the name of the author in every article.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Browsing options in Alphabet Display</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Browsing options in Alphabet Display</b></p>
-<P>You can customize the way a user can browse a glossary. Browsing and searching are always available, but you can define three more options:</p>
+<p>You can customize the way a user can browse a glossary. Browsing and searching are always available, but you can define three more options:</p>
<p><b>SHOW SPECIAL</b> Enable or disable browsing by special characters like @, #, etc.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Students can post entries</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Students can post entries</b></p>
-<P>You can specify whether a student can or cannot add, edit or delete his/her own entries.
+<p>You can specify whether a student can or cannot add, edit or delete his/her own entries.
Entries exported to a main glossary can be updated or deleted by teachers only, so this setting
only applies to secondary glossaries.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Enabling automatic linking in a glossary</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Enabling automatic linking in a glossary</b></p>
-<P>Turning this feature on will allow individual entries in this glossary to be automatically linked whenever
+<p>Turning this feature on will allow individual entries in this glossary to be automatically linked whenever
the concept words and phrases appear throughout the rest of the same course. This includes forum
postings, internal resources, week summaries, journals and so on. </p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Enabling automatic linking in a entry</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Enabling automatic linking in a entry</b></p>
-<P>Turning this feature on will allow the entry to be automatically linked, whenever
+<p>Turning this feature on will allow the entry to be automatically linked, whenever
the concept words and phrases appear throughout the rest of the same course. This includes forum
postings, internal resources, week summaries, journals and so on. </p>
</ul>
</p>
-<P>The group mode can be defined at two levels:</p>
+<p>The group mode can be defined at two levels:</p>
<dl>
<dt><b>1. Course level</b></dt>
the setting for each activity is ignored.</dd>
</dl>
-<P>
+<p>
<p align="center"><b>Force Group Mode</b></p>
-<P>If the group mode is "forced" at a course-level, then
+<p>If the group mode is "forced" at a course-level, then
the course group mode is applied to every activity
in that course. Individual group settings in each
activity are then ignored. </p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Guest Access</B></P>\r
-\r
-<P>You have the choice of allowing "guests" into your course.\r
-\r
-<P>People can log in as guests using the "Login as a guest" button\r
- on the login screen.\r
-\r
-<P>Guests ALWAYS have "read-only" access - meaning they can't leave \r
- any posts or otherwise mess up the course for real students.\r
-\r
-<P>This can be handy when you want to let a colleague in to \r
- look around at your work, or to let students see a course before \r
- they have decided to enrol.\r
-\r
-<P>Note that you have a choice between two types of guest access:\r
- with the enrolment key or without. If you choose to allow \r
- guests who have the key, then the guest will need to provide \r
- the current enrolment key EVERY TIME they log in (unlike \r
- students who only need to do it once). This lets you restrict \r
- your guests. If you choose to allow guests without a key, then \r
- anyone can get straight into your course.\r
+<p align="center"><b>Guest Access</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>You have the choice of allowing "guests" into your course.
+
+
+
+<p>People can log in as guests using the "Login as a guest" button
+
+ on the login screen.
+
+
+
+<p>Guests ALWAYS have "read-only" access - meaning they can't leave
+
+ any posts or otherwise mess up the course for real students.
+
+
+
+<p>This can be handy when you want to let a colleague in to
+
+ look around at your work, or to let students see a course before
+
+ they have decided to enrol.
+
+
+
+<p>Note that you have a choice between two types of guest access:
+
+ with the enrolment key or without. If you choose to allow
+
+ guests who have the key, then the guest will need to provide
+
+ the current enrolment key EVERY TIME they log in (unlike
+
+ students who only need to do it once). This lets you restrict
+
+ your guests. If you choose to allow guests without a key, then
+
+ anyone can get straight into your course.
+
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Help on writing html</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Help on writing html</b></p>
-<P>When writing HTML in Moodle, you are free to use almost any HTML tags you like
+<p>When writing HTML in Moodle, you are free to use almost any HTML tags you like
to produce the effect you want.</p>
-<P>Note that scripting (eg Javascript or VB Script) is not allowed, and will be removed
- automatically.</P>
+<p>Note that scripting (eg Javascript or VB Script) is not allowed, and will be removed
+ automatically.</p>
-<P>Your code will normally be printed on the page within a table cell,
+<p>Your code will normally be printed on the page within a table cell,
so:
- <UL>
- <LI>there is no need to use any <HEAD> or <BODY> tags
- <LI>be careful about unmatched </TABLE> tags that may mess up the display.
- </UL>
+ <ul>
+ <li>there is no need to use any <HEAD> or <BODY> tags
+ <li>be careful about unmatched </TABLE> tags that may mess up the display.
+ </ul>
<p>Smilies (emoticons) will be converted into their graphical equivalent, and
bare URLs will be converted into links.</p>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/journal/icon.gif"> <B>Journals</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module is a very important reflective activity. The teacher
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/journal/icon.gif"> <b>Journals</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module is a very important reflective activity. The teacher
asks the student to reflect on a particular topic, and the student can
edit and refine their answer over time. This answer is private and
can only be seen by the teacher, who can offer feedback and a grade
on each journal entry. It's usually a good idea to have about one
- Journal activity per week.</P>
-</UL>
+ Journal activity per week.</p>
+</ul>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/label/icon.gif"> <B>Labels</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This is a not a true activity - it is a "dummy" activity that allows you
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/label/icon.gif"> <b>Labels</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This is a not a true activity - it is a "dummy" activity that allows you
to insert text and graphics among the other activities on the course page.</p>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Language Editing</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Language Editing</b></p>
-<P>To edit languages on this page the files need to be writable
+<p>To edit languages on this page the files need to be writable
by the web server process.
-<P>Within some of the strings you will notice <B>$a</B> and <B>$a->something</B>.
+<p>Within some of the strings you will notice <b>$a</b> and <b>$a->something</b>.
-<P>These represent variables that will be replaced by names or other words from
+<p>These represent variables that will be replaced by names or other words from
within Moodle.
-<P>When there is only one variable, the $a form is used. When there are two or
+<p>When there is only one variable, the $a form is used. When there are two or
more variables, then each one has a name.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Importing new questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing new questions</b></p>
-<P>This function allows you to import questions from
+<p>This function allows you to import questions from
external text files, uploaded through a form.
-<P>A number of file formats are supported:
+<p>A number of file formats are supported:
-<P><B>GIFT format</B></P>
+<p><b>GIFT format</b></p>
<ul>
<p>GIFT is the most comprehensive import format available for importing
Moodle quiz questions from a text file. It was designed to be an easy
When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822}
</pre>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
</ul>
-<P><B>Aiken format</B></P>
+<p><b>Aiken format</b></p>
<ul>
<p>The Aiken format is a very simple way of creating multiple choice questions using a very clear human-readable format. Here is an example of the format:</p>
<pre>
ANSWER: A
</pre>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formataiken.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Aiken" format</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formataiken.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Aiken" format</a></p>
</ul>
-<P><B>Missing Word</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This format only supports multiple choice questions.
+<p><b>Missing Word</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This format only supports multiple choice questions.
Each answer is separated with a tilde (~), and the correct answer is
prefixed with an equals sign (=). Here is an example:
-<BLOCKQUOTE>As soon as we begin to explore our body parts as infants
+<blockquote>As soon as we begin to explore our body parts as infants
we become students of {=anatomy and physiology ~reflexology
~science ~experiment}, and in a sense we remain students for life.
-</BLOCKQUOTE>
+</blockquote>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatmissingword.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Missing Word" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatmissingword.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Missing Word" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>AON</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This is the same as Missing Word Format, except that after importing
+<p><b>AON</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This is the same as Missing Word Format, except that after importing
the questions all Short-Answer questions are converted four at a time
- into Matching Questions.</P>
+ into Matching Questions.</p>
<p>Additionally, the answers of multiple-choice questions are randomly
shuffled during the import.
<p>It's named after an organisation that sponsored the development of many
quiz features</p>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Blackboard</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module can import questions saved in Blackboard's export
-format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP.</P>
+<p><b>Blackboard</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module can import questions saved in Blackboard's export
+format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatblackboard.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Blackboard" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatblackboard.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Blackboard" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Course Test Manager</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module can import questions saved in a Course Test Manager test bank.
+<p><b>Course Test Manager</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module can import questions saved in a Course Test Manager test bank.
It relies on different ways of accessing the test bank, which is in a Microsoft Access
-database, depending on whether Moodle is running on a Windows or Linux web server.</P>
+database, depending on whether Moodle is running on a Windows or Linux web server.</p>
<p>On Windows it lets you upload the access database just like any other data import file.</p>
<p>On Linux, you must set up a windows machine on the same network with the Course Test
Manager database and a piece of software called the ODBC Socket Server, which uses XML
using this import class.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatctm.html&module=quiz">More info about the "CTM" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatctm.html&module=quiz">More info about the "CTM" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Custom</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>If you have your own format that you need to import, you can
+<p><b>Custom</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>If you have your own format that you need to import, you can
implement it yourself by editing mod/quiz/format/custom.php
-<P>The amount of new code needed is quite small - just enough
+<p>The amount of new code needed is quite small - just enough
to parse a single question from given text.
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatcustom.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Custom" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatcustom.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Custom" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
+<p>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
Moodle users can contribute! </p>
-<IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/lesson/icon.gif"> <B>Lesson</B>
+<img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/lesson/icon.gif"> <b>Lesson</b>
-<UL>
-<P>A lesson delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a
+<ul>
+<p>A lesson delivers content in an interesting and flexible way. It consists of a
number of pages. Each page normally ends with a question and a number of
possible answers. Depending on the student's choice of answer they either
progress to the next page or are taken back to a previous page. Navigation
through the lesson can be straight forward or complex, depending largely
on the structure of the material being presented.</p>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Activity Modules</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Activity Modules</b></p>
-<P>Moodle contains a wide range of activity modules that can be used to
- build up any type of course.</P>
+<p>Moodle contains a wide range of activity modules that can be used to
+ build up any type of course.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Uploading a picture</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Uploading a picture</b></p>
-<P>You can upload a picture from your computer to this server, and this picture will be used in various places to represent you.
-<P>For this reason, the best images to use are a close-up of your face, but you can use any image you like.
-<P>The picture must be in JPG or PNG format (ie the names will usually end in .jpg or .png).
-<P>You can get a picture file using one of four methods:
+<p>You can upload a picture from your computer to this server, and this picture will be used in various places to represent you.
+<p>For this reason, the best images to use are a close-up of your face, but you can use any image you like.
+<p>The picture must be in JPG or PNG format (ie the names will usually end in .jpg or .png).
+<p>You can get a picture file using one of four methods:
-<OL>
-<LI>Using a digital camera, your photos will most likely already be on your computer in the right format.
-<LI>You can use a scanner to scan a printed photograph. Make sure you save it as JPG or PNG format.
-<LI>If you're artistic, you might draw a picture using a paint program.
-<LI>Lastly, you can "steal" images from the web. <A TARGET=google HREF="http://images.google.com/">http://images.google.com</A> is a superb place to search for images. Once you find one, you can "right-click" on them with the mouse and choose "Save this image..." from the menu (different computers may vary slightly).
-</OL>
+<ol>
+<li>Using a digital camera, your photos will most likely already be on your computer in the right format.
+<li>You can use a scanner to scan a printed photograph. Make sure you save it as JPG or PNG format.
+<li>If you're artistic, you might draw a picture using a paint program.
+<li>Lastly, you can "steal" images from the web. <a target="google" href="http://images.google.com/">http://images.google.com</a> is a superb place to search for images. Once you find one, you can "right-click" on them with the mouse and choose "Save this image..." from the menu (different computers may vary slightly).
+</ol>
-<P>To upload the image, click the "Browse" button on this editing page, and select the image from your hard disk.
-<P>NOTE: Make sure that the file is not larger than the maximum size listed, or it will not be uploaded.
-<P>Then click "Update my Profile" at the bottom - the image file will be cropped to a square and resized down to 100x100 pixels.
-<P>When you are taken back to your profile page, the image might not appear to have changed. If this is so, just use the "Reload" button in your browser.
+<p>To upload the image, click the "Browse" button on this editing page, and select the image from your hard disk.
+<p>NOTE: Make sure that the file is not larger than the maximum size listed, or it will not be uploaded.
+<p>Then click "Update my Profile" at the bottom - the image file will be cropped to a square and resized down to 100x100 pixels.
+<p>When you are taken back to your profile page, the image might not appear to have changed. If this is so, just use the "Reload" button in your browser.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Manage Surveys using phpESP</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Manage Surveys using phpESP</b></p>
+<p>
The questionnaire module uses phpESP to create and manage surveys. Use this link to manage your surveys.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Survey response type</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Survey response type</b></p>
+<p>
If you want your users to only be able to fill out the survey once, choose "respond once".<br />
If you want them to be able to fill it out multiple times, choose "respond many".
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Choose a survey</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Choose a survey</b></p>
+<p>
Select the survey from the list of available <i>active</i> surveys available from phpESP. If your survey isn't
listed, its probably not <b>active</b>.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Survey response type</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Survey response type</b></p>
+<p>
You can display your users' full names with each response by setting this to "fullname".<br />
You can hide your users' identities from the respones by setting this to "anonymous".
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Questions</B></P>\r
-\r
-<P>A good way to help other people think about a subject is to \r
- ask them a question about it. Being asked a good question\r
- can really help us put information together, evaluate our\r
- existing ideas and create new ideas.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>Asking questions that are specifically intended to help \r
- others learn is known as <I>Socratic questioning</I>, named\r
- after Socrates in Ancient Greece.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>Socratic questions require you to listen very carefully\r
- to the other person to help you judge and phrase your question\r
- in a helpful, constructive, and hopefully non-confrontational way.\r
-\r
-<P>Here are some examples of such questions:</P>\r
-\r
-<!--Hidden comment: Someday I will include a great example dialogue here -->\r
-\r
-<h3>Questions of clarification</h3>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>What do you mean when you say ______?</li>\r
- <li>What is your main point?</li>\r
- <li>How does _____ relate to _____?</li>\r
- <li>Could you put that another way?</li>\r
- <li>Let me see if I understand you; do you mean _____ or _____?</li>\r
- <li>How does this relate to our problem/discussion/issue?</li>\r
- <li>Jane, can you summarize in your own words what Richard said? ... Richard, is this what you meant?</li>\r
- <li>Could you give me an example?</li>\r
- <li>Would _____ be a good example of that?</li>\r
-</ul>\r
-<h3>Questions that probe assumptions</h3>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>What are you assuming here?</li>\r
- <li>What is Jenny assuming?</li>\r
- <li>What could we assume instead?</li>\r
- <li>You seem to be assuming _____. Do I understand you correctly?</li>\r
- <li>All of your reasoning depends on the idea that _____. Why have you based your reasoning on _____ instead of _____?</li>\r
- <li>You seem to be assuming _____. How do you justify taking that for granted?</li>\r
- <li>Is that always the case? Why do you think the assumption holds here?</li>\r
- <li>Why would someone make that assumption? </li>\r
-</ul>\r
-<h3>Questions that probe reasons and evidence</h3>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>Could you explain your reasons to us?</li>\r
- <li>How does that apply to this case?</li>\r
- <li>Is there a reason to doubt that evidence?</li>\r
- <li>Who is in a position to know that is true?</li>\r
- <li>What would you say to someone who said that ____?</li>\r
- <li>Can someone else give evidence to support that view?</li>\r
- <li>By what reasoning did you come to that conclusion?</li>\r
- <li>How could we find out if that is true? </li>\r
-</ul>\r
-<h3>Questions about viewpoints or perspectives </h3>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>What are you implying by that?</li>\r
- <li>When you say _____, are you implying _____?</li>\r
- <li>But, if that happened, what else would happen as a result? Why?</li>\r
- <li>What effect would that have?</li>\r
- <li>Would that necessarily happen or only possibly/probably happen?</li>\r
- <li>What is an alternative?</li>\r
- <li>If _____ and _____ are the case, then what might also be true?</li>\r
- <li>If we say that ____ is ethical, how about _____? </li>\r
-</ul>\r
-<h3>Questions that probe implications and consequences </h3>\r
-<ul>\r
- <li>How can we find out?</li>\r
- <li>What does this question assume?</li>\r
- <li>Would _____ ask this question differently?</li>\r
- <li>How could someone settle this question?</li>\r
- <li>Can we break this question down at all?</li>\r
- <li>Is this question clear? Do we understand it?</li>\r
- <li>Is this question easy or hard to answer? Why?</li>\r
- <li>Do we all agree that this is the question?</li>\r
- <li>To answer this question, what other questions must we answer first?</li>\r
- <li>How would _____ state the issue?</li>\r
- <li>Why is this issue important?</li>\r
- <li>Is this the most important question, or is there an underlying question?</li>\r
- <li>Can you see how this might relate to ________?</li>\r
-</ul>\r
-\r
-<HR>\r
-<FONT SIZE=1><I>Questions adapted from Paul, R. (1993). Critical Thinking: How To Prepare Students for a Rapidly Changing World: Foundation for Critical Thinking, Santa Rosa, CA. </I></FONT>\r
-\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=writing.html">More info about writing</a></p>\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=reading.html">More info about reading</a></p>\r
+<p align="center"><b>Questions</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>A good way to help other people think about a subject is to
+
+ ask them a question about it. Being asked a good question
+
+ can really help us put information together, evaluate our
+
+ existing ideas and create new ideas.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>Asking questions that are specifically intended to help
+
+ others learn is known as <i>Socratic questioning</i>, named
+
+ after Socrates in Ancient Greece.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>Socratic questions require you to listen very carefully
+
+ to the other person to help you judge and phrase your question
+
+ in a helpful, constructive, and hopefully non-confrontational way.
+
+
+
+<p>Here are some examples of such questions:</p>
+
+
+
+<!--Hidden comment: Someday I will include a great example dialogue here -->
+
+
+
+<h3>Questions of clarification</h3>
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>What do you mean when you say ______?</li>
+
+ <li>What is your main point?</li>
+
+ <li>How does _____ relate to _____?</li>
+
+ <li>Could you put that another way?</li>
+
+ <li>Let me see if I understand you; do you mean _____ or _____?</li>
+
+ <li>How does this relate to our problem/discussion/issue?</li>
+
+ <li>Jane, can you summarize in your own words what Richard said? ... Richard, is this what you meant?</li>
+
+ <li>Could you give me an example?</li>
+
+ <li>Would _____ be a good example of that?</li>
+
+</ul>
+
+<h3>Questions that probe assumptions</h3>
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>What are you assuming here?</li>
+
+ <li>What is Jenny assuming?</li>
+
+ <li>What could we assume instead?</li>
+
+ <li>You seem to be assuming _____. Do I understand you correctly?</li>
+
+ <li>All of your reasoning depends on the idea that _____. Why have you based your reasoning on _____ instead of _____?</li>
+
+ <li>You seem to be assuming _____. How do you justify taking that for granted?</li>
+
+ <li>Is that always the case? Why do you think the assumption holds here?</li>
+
+ <li>Why would someone make that assumption? </li>
+
+</ul>
+
+<h3>Questions that probe reasons and evidence</h3>
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>Could you explain your reasons to us?</li>
+
+ <li>How does that apply to this case?</li>
+
+ <li>Is there a reason to doubt that evidence?</li>
+
+ <li>Who is in a position to know that is true?</li>
+
+ <li>What would you say to someone who said that ____?</li>
+
+ <li>Can someone else give evidence to support that view?</li>
+
+ <li>By what reasoning did you come to that conclusion?</li>
+
+ <li>How could we find out if that is true? </li>
+
+</ul>
+
+<h3>Questions about viewpoints or perspectives </h3>
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>What are you implying by that?</li>
+
+ <li>When you say _____, are you implying _____?</li>
+
+ <li>But, if that happened, what else would happen as a result? Why?</li>
+
+ <li>What effect would that have?</li>
+
+ <li>Would that necessarily happen or only possibly/probably happen?</li>
+
+ <li>What is an alternative?</li>
+
+ <li>If _____ and _____ are the case, then what might also be true?</li>
+
+ <li>If we say that ____ is ethical, how about _____? </li>
+
+</ul>
+
+<h3>Questions that probe implications and consequences </h3>
+
+<ul>
+
+ <li>How can we find out?</li>
+
+ <li>What does this question assume?</li>
+
+ <li>Would _____ ask this question differently?</li>
+
+ <li>How could someone settle this question?</li>
+
+ <li>Can we break this question down at all?</li>
+
+ <li>Is this question clear? Do we understand it?</li>
+
+ <li>Is this question easy or hard to answer? Why?</li>
+
+ <li>Do we all agree that this is the question?</li>
+
+ <li>To answer this question, what other questions must we answer first?</li>
+
+ <li>How would _____ state the issue?</li>
+
+ <li>Why is this issue important?</li>
+
+ <li>Is this the most important question, or is there an underlying question?</li>
+
+ <li>Can you see how this might relate to ________?</li>
+
+</ul>
+
+
+
+<hr />
+
+<font size="1"><i>Questions adapted from Paul, R. (1993). Critical Thinking: How To Prepare Students for a Rapidly Changing World: Foundation for Critical Thinking, Santa Rosa, CA. </i></font>
+
+
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=writing.html">More info about writing</a></p>
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=reading.html">More info about reading</a></p>
+
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Quiz attempts</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Quiz attempts</b></p>
-<P>Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz.
+<p>Students may be allowed to have multiple attempts at a quiz.
-<P>This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of
+<p>This can help make the process of taking the quiz more of
an educational activity rather than simply an assessment.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Calculated questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Calculated questions</b></p>
Calculated questions offers a way to create individual numerical question by the use of wildcards that are substituted with individual values when the quiz is taken.
<br/>Below is a shrunken view of the main editing page with some example inputs:<br/>
<br/>More details on how to use these PHP-style functions can be found in the <a target="phpmathdoc" href="http://www.php.net/manual/en/ref.math.php">documentation at the PHP web site</a>
<br/><br/>
As for numerical questions it is possible to allow a margin within which all responses are accepted as correct. The "Tolerance" field is used for this. However, there are three different types of tolerances. These are <b>Relative, Nominal and Geometric</b>. If we say that the correct answer at quiz time is calculated to 200 and the tolerance is set to 0.5 then the different tolerance types work like this:
-<br/><br/><b>Relative:</B> A tolerance interval is calculated by multiplying the correct answer with 0.5, ie in this case we get 100 so for this tolerance the correct response must be between 100 and 300. (200 ± 100)<br/>
+<br/><br/><b>Relative:</b> A tolerance interval is calculated by multiplying the correct answer with 0.5, ie in this case we get 100 so for this tolerance the correct response must be between 100 and 300. (200 ± 100)<br/>
This is useful if the magnitude of the correct answer can differ greatly between different wildcard values.
<br/><br/><b>Nominal:</b> This is the simpliest tolerance type but not very powerful. The correct response must be between 199.5 and 200.5 (200 ± 0.5)<br/>
This tolerance type can be useful if the differences between different correct answers are small.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Question categories</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Question categories</b></p>
-<P>Rather than keeping all your questions in one big list,
+<p>Rather than keeping all your questions in one big list,
you can create categories to keep them in.
-<P>Each category consists of a name and a short description.
+<p>Each category consists of a name and a short description.
-<P>Each category can also be "published", which means
+<p>Each category can also be "published", which means
that the category (and all questions in it) will be
available to all courses on this server, so that
other courses can use your questions in their quizzes.
-<P>Categories can also be created or deleted at will.
+<p>Categories can also be created or deleted at will.
However, if you try to delete a category containing
questions, then you will be asked to specify another
category to move them to.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Show correct answers</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Show correct answers</b></p>
-<P>If you enable correct answers, then the
+<p>If you enable correct answers, then the
feedback will show also show the correct answer
for each question (highlighted in a bright colour).
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Create multiple questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Create multiple questions</b></p>
-<P>This page allows you to create multiple questions at once.</P>
+<p>This page allows you to create multiple questions at once.</p>
-<P>Currently it will only allow you to create a number of
+<p>Currently it will only allow you to create a number of
Random Questions and (optionally) add them to the current
- quiz.</P>
+ quiz.</p>
-<P>Eventually this page will evolve into a larger wizard that
- will have more options.</P>
+<p>Eventually this page will evolve into a larger wizard that
+ will have more options.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Description</B></P>\r
-\r
-<P>This type of question is not really a question. </p>\r
-\r
-<p>All it does is print some text without requiring any answers.</p>\r
-\r
-<P>It can be used to print a descriptive text to be used by a following group of questions.</p>\r
+<p align="center"><b>Description</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>This type of question is not really a question. </p>
+
+
+
+<p>All it does is print some text without requiring any answers.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>It can be used to print a descriptive text to be used by a following group of questions.</p>
+
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Discrimination Index</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Discrimination Index</b></p>
-<P>This provides a rough indicator of the performance of each item. It is calculated by counting the number of students who scored in top third on this quiz for each question and dividing this figure by the number of students who scored in the bottom third. </p>
+<p>This provides a rough indicator of the performance of each item. It is calculated by counting the number of students who scored in top third on this quiz for each question and dividing this figure by the number of students who scored in the bottom third. </p>
-<p>For example, if 30 students took the quiz, there would be 10 students each in the top third and bottom third. If, on item #1, 9 of the best students got it right, but only 3 of the poorest third got it right, the discrimination index would be 9/3 = 3.0. The numbers in parentheses are: (top third correct responses/bottom third correct responses). </P>
+<p>For example, if 30 students took the quiz, there would be 10 students each in the top third and bottom third. If, on item #1, 9 of the best students got it right, but only 3 of the poorest third got it right, the discrimination index would be 9/3 = 3.0. The numbers in parentheses are: (top third correct responses/bottom third correct responses). </p>
-<P>If the index goes below 1.0 it means that more of the weaker students got the item right than the stronger students. Such items should be discarded as worthless. In fact, they reduce the accuracy of the overall score for the quiz. </P>
+<p>If the index goes below 1.0 it means that more of the weaker students got the item right than the stronger students. Such items should be discarded as worthless. In fact, they reduce the accuracy of the overall score for the quiz. </p>
-<P>If no weak students got the item correct, the denominator would be 0 which would yield a result of infinity. The program substitutes a '10' for any such items. </P>
+<p>If no weak students got the item correct, the denominator would be 0 which would yield a result of infinity. The program substitutes a '10' for any such items. </p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Exporting questions from a Category</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Exporting questions from a Category</b></p>
-<P>This function allows you to export a complete category of questions to
+<p>This function allows you to export a complete category of questions to
a text file.
<p>Please note that in many file formats some information is lost
You are advised to check exported data before using
it in a production environment.</p>
-<P>The format(s) currently supported are:</p>
+<p>The format(s) currently supported are:</p>
-<P><B>GIFT format</B></P>
+<p><b>GIFT format</b></p>
<ul>
<p>GIFT is the most comprehensive import/export format available for exporting
Moodle quiz questions to a text file. It was designed to be an easy
When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822}
</pre>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
</ul>
-<P>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
+<p>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
Moodle users can contribute! </p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Feedback</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Feedback</b></p>
-<P>If you enable quiz feedback, then students will receive
- question feedback on every answer (right or wrong).</P>
+<p>If you enable quiz feedback, then students will receive
+ question feedback on every answer (right or wrong).</p>
-<p align=center><b>Importing "Aiken" format files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "Aiken" format files</b></p>
<p>The Aiken format is a very simple way of creating multiple choice questions using a clear human-readable format. Here is an example of the format:</p>
<pre>
-<p align=center><b>Importing "Blackboard Quiz Format" files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "Blackboard Quiz Format" files</b></p>
<p>Documentation not completed</p>
-<p align=center><b>Importing "Course Test Manager" files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "Course Test Manager" files</b></p>
<p>Course Test Manager is an "End of Lifetime" software package from Course Technology.
It is no longer being actively developed by Course Technology. It has been replaced by
<a href="http://odbcsock.sourceforge.net/" target="_new"><b>ODBC Socket Server</b></a>. In order to import CTM databases on Linux, you must first download and install
this small network program on the Windows system that hosts your CTM databases. <b>Do not</b> follow the installation
steps outlined in the ODBC Socket Server Installation. They're more complicated than they need to be!
-Instead, follow these steps to install this program on your Windows system:</P>
+Instead, follow these steps to install this program on your Windows system:</p>
<ol><li>Go to the windows system and unzip the install file you downloaded from
<a href="http://odbcsock.sourceforge.net/" target="_new">this site</a> on the system.</li>
<li>Open the Service Manager by either going to
Start->Settings->Control Panels->Administrative Tools->Services or by right-clicking on
-<b>My Computer</b>, choosing <b>Manage</b>, then choosing <B>Services and Applications->Services</b> from
+<b>My Computer</b>, choosing <b>Manage</b>, then choosing <b>Services and Applications->Services</b> from
the right panel. You may also access the Service manager by typing <b>services.msc</b> in the Start->Run...
dialog</li>
as the IP address or hostname of the Windows server. You're going to need this information for the import process.</li>
<li>Now you may import the testbank or testbanks into moodle. Crete your quiz and go into the
-"import questions from file" process. <B>NOW HERE'S WHERE THINGS ARE DIFFERENT FOR LINUX - </B>
+"import questions from file" process. <b>NOW HERE'S WHERE THINGS ARE DIFFERENT FOR LINUX - </b>
YOU MUST SPECIFY A DUMMY FILE IN THE UPLOAD FIELD TO GET THE IMPORT PROCESS STARTED. THIS FILE <b>WILL NOT</b>
BE PROCESSED, IT'S JUST A PLACEHOLDER FOR THE IMPORT FORM. YOU WILL GET A PLACE TO SPECIFY THE WINDOWS SERVER
INFORMATION NEXT. Next, you will get a screen where you can type in the hostname for the Windows ODBC Socket Server
AND YOU'RE ABOUT TO IMPORT QUESTIONS TO MOODLE!</li>
</ol>
-<P>If you received error messages during this process, you may find this technical information useful.
+<p>If you received error messages during this process, you may find this technical information useful.
The ODBC Socket server uses port 9628 to open a socket and trade and XML query for an XML result table of
the query results. The import class parses that XML and use it just like I use a local query to do the importing.
</p>
\ No newline at end of file
-<p align=center><b>Importing custom format files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing custom format files</b></p>
<p>Documentation not completed</p>
-<p align=center><b>Importing "GIFT" format files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "GIFT" format files</b></p>
<p>GIFT is the most comprehensive import format available for importing
Moodle quiz questions from a text file. It supports Multiple-Choice,
True-False, Short Answer, Matching and Numerical questions, as well as insertion
-<p align=center><b>Importing "Missing Word" format files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "Missing Word" format files</b></p>
<p>Documentation not completed</p>
-<p align=center><b>Importing "WebCT Quiz Format" files</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing "WebCT Quiz Format" files</b></p>
<p>The WebCT import filter is in development and does not support
all of the WebCT question types.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading method</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading method</b></p>
-<P>When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways
+<p>When multiple attempts are allowed, there are different ways
you can use the grades to calculate the student's final
grade for the quiz.
-<P><B>Highest grade</B><P>
-<UL>
-<P>The final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt.
-</UL>
+<p><b>Highest grade</b><p>
+<ul>
+<p>The final grade is the highest (best) grade in any attempt.
+</ul>
-<P><B>Average grade</B><P>
-<UL>
-<P>The final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts.
-</UL>
+<p><b>Average grade</b><p>
+<ul>
+<p>The final grade is the average (simple mean) grade of all attempts.
+</ul>
-<P><B>First grade</B><P>
-<UL>
-<P>The final grade is the grade gained on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored).
-</UL>
+<p><b>First grade</b><p>
+<ul>
+<p>The final grade is the grade gained on the first attempt (other attempts are ignored).
+</ul>
-<P><B>Last grade</B><P>
-<UL>
-<P>The final grade is the grade gained on the most recent attempt only.
-</UL>
+<p><b>Last grade</b><p>
+<ul>
+<p>The final grade is the grade gained on the most recent attempt only.
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Importing new questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Importing new questions</b></p>
-<P>This function allows you to import questions from
+<p>This function allows you to import questions from
external text files, uploaded through a form.
-<P>A number of file formats are supported:
+<p>A number of file formats are supported:
-<P><B>GIFT format</B></P>
+<p><b>GIFT format</b></p>
<ul>
<p>GIFT is the most comprehensive import format available for importing
Moodle quiz questions from a text file. It was designed to be an easy
When was Ulysses S. Grant born?{#1822}
</pre>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatgift.html&module=quiz">More info about the "GIFT" format</a></p>
</ul>
-<P><B>Aiken format</B></P>
+<p><b>Aiken format</b></p>
<ul>
<p>The Aiken format is a very simple way of creating multiple choice questions using a very clear human-readable format. Here is an example of the format:</p>
<pre>
ANSWER: A
</pre>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formataiken.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Aiken" format</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formataiken.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Aiken" format</a></p>
</ul>
-<P><B>Missing Word</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This format only supports multiple choice questions.
+<p><b>Missing Word</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This format only supports multiple choice questions.
Each answer is separated with a tilde (~), and the correct answer is
prefixed with an equals sign (=). Here is an example:
-<BLOCKQUOTE>As soon as we begin to explore our body parts as infants
+<blockquote>As soon as we begin to explore our body parts as infants
we become students of {=anatomy and physiology ~reflexology
~science ~experiment}, and in a sense we remain students for life.
-</BLOCKQUOTE>
+</blockquote>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatmissingword.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Missing Word" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatmissingword.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Missing Word" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>AON</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This is the same as Missing Word Format, except that after importing
+<p><b>AON</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This is the same as Missing Word Format, except that after importing
the questions all Short-Answer questions are converted four at a time
- into Matching Questions.</P>
+ into Matching Questions.</p>
<p>Additionally, the answers of multiple-choice questions are randomly
shuffled during the import.
<p>It's named after an organisation that sponsored the development of many
quiz features</p>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Blackboard</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module can import questions saved in Blackboard's export
-format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP.</P>
+<p><b>Blackboard</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module can import questions saved in Blackboard's export
+format. It relies on XML functions being compiled into your PHP.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatblackboard.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Blackboard" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatblackboard.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Blackboard" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>WebCT</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module can import questions saved in WebCT's text-based format.</P>
+<p><b>WebCT</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module can import questions saved in WebCT's text-based format.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatwebct.html&module=quiz">More info about the "WebCT" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatwebct.html&module=quiz">More info about the "WebCT" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Course Test Manager</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module can import questions saved in a Course Test Manager test bank.
+<p><b>Course Test Manager</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module can import questions saved in a Course Test Manager test bank.
It relies on different ways of accessing the test bank, which is in a Microsoft Access
-database, depending on whether Moodle is running on a Windows or Linux web server.</P>
+database, depending on whether Moodle is running on a Windows or Linux web server.</p>
<p>On Windows it lets you upload the access database just like any other data import file.</p>
<p>On Linux, you must set up a windows machine on the same network with the Course Test
Manager database and a piece of software called the ODBC Socket Server, which uses XML
using this import class.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatctm.html&module=quiz">More info about the "CTM" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatctm.html&module=quiz">More info about the "CTM" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Embedded answers (Cloze)</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This special purpose format imports just one type of question, the
+<p><b>Embedded answers (Cloze)</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This special purpose format imports just one type of question, the
Embedded Answers (also known as Cloze) format.
</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=multianswer.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Cloze" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=multianswer.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Cloze" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Custom</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>If you have your own format that you need to import, you can
+<p><b>Custom</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>If you have your own format that you need to import, you can
implement it yourself by editing mod/quiz/format/custom.php
-<P>The amount of new code needed is quite small - just enough
+<p>The amount of new code needed is quite small - just enough
to parse a single question from given text.
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=formatcustom.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Custom" format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=formatcustom.html&module=quiz">More info about the "Custom" format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
+<p>More formats are yet to come, including WebCT, IMS QTI and whatever else
Moodle users can contribute! </p>
-<p align=center><b>Matching questions</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Matching questions</b></p>
<p>After an optional introduction, the respondent is presented with
several sub-questions and several jumbled answers. There is one
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Maximum grade</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Maximum grade</b></p>
-<P>The maximum grade you set for a quiz is what all grades
+<p>The maximum grade you set for a quiz is what all grades
are scaled to.
-<P>For example, you might set the max grade to 20, because the
+<p>For example, you might set the max grade to 20, because the
quiz is worth 20% of the whole course.
-<P>Even though you might have 10 questions in your quiz
+<p>Even though you might have 10 questions in your quiz
worth a total of 50 marks, all grades out of 50 will be
"scaled down" to the quiz max grade of 20.
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/quiz/icon.gif"> <B>Quizzes</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This module allows the teacher to design and set quiz tests, consisting of
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/quiz/icon.gif"> <b>Quizzes</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This module allows the teacher to design and set quiz tests, consisting of
multiple choice, true-false, and short answer questions. These
questions are kept in a categorised database, and can be re-used
within courses and even between courses. Quizzes can allow
multiple attempts. Each attempt is automatically marked, and the
teacher can choose whether to give feedback or to show correct answers.
- This module includes grading facilities.</P>
-</UL>
+ This module includes grading facilities.</p>
+</ul>
<form>
<center>
-<textarea rows=15 cols=60 wrap=virtual>This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer} and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer} and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%N/A#Feedback for halfcredit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.
+<textarea rows="15" cols="60" wrap="virtual">This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer} and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer} and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%N/A#Feedback for halfcredit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}
<form>
-<table align="CENTER" width="90%" class="generalbox" border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0"><tr><td bgcolor="#FFFFFF" class="generalboxcontent"><table width=100% cellspacing=10><tr><td nowrap width=100 valign=top><p align=center><b>3</b></p><p align=center><font size=1>8 Marks</font></p><img height="1" width="100" src="pix/spacer.gif" alt=""><br />
-</td><td valign=top><p>This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here <select name="q4ma1" ><option></option><option value="4" >Wrong answer</option><option value="5" >Another wrong answer</option><option value="6" >Correct answer</option><option value="7" >Answer that gives half the credit</option></select> and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer <input name="q4ma2" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> and finally we have a floating point number <input name="q4ma3" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> .<br />\r
-<br />\r
-Note that addresses like <a href="http://www.moodle.org" target="newpage">www.moodle.org</a> and smileys <img border="0" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"> all work as normal:<br />\r
-a) How good is this? <select name="q4ma4" ><option></option><option value="13" >Yes</option><option value="14" >No</option></select> <br />\r
-b) What grade would you give it? <input name="q4ma5" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> <br />\r
-<br />\r
-Good luck!</p></TD></TR></TABLE></td></tr></table>
+<table align="CENTER" width="90%" class="generalbox" border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0"><tr><td bgcolor="#FFFFFF" class="generalboxcontent"><table width="100%" cellspacing="10"><tr><td nowrap width="100" valign="top"><p align="center"><b>3</b></p><p align="center"><font size="1">8 Marks</font></p><img height="1" width="100" src="pix/spacer.gif" alt=""><br />
+</td><td valign="top"><p>This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here <select name="q4ma1" ><option></option><option value="4" >Wrong answer</option><option value="5" >Another wrong answer</option><option value="6" >Correct answer</option><option value="7" >Answer that gives half the credit</option></select> and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer <input name="q4ma2" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> and finally we have a floating point number <input name="q4ma3" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> .<br />
+
+<br />
+
+Note that addresses like <a href="http://www.moodle.org" target="newpage">www.moodle.org</a> and smileys <img border="0" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"> all work as normal:<br />
+
+a) How good is this? <select name="q4ma4" ><option></option><option value="13" >Yes</option><option value="14" >No</option></select> <br />
+
+b) What grade would you give it? <input name="q4ma5" value="" type="TEXT" size="8"/> <br />
+
+<br />
+
+Good luck!</p></td></tr></table></td></tr></table>
</form>
<br />
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Multiple Choice questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Multiple Choice questions</b></p>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
chooses from multiple answers. There are two types of multiple choice
questions - single answer and multiple answer.
-<P>Single-answer questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen.
+<p>Single-answer questions allow one and only one answer to be chosen.
Generally all the grades for such a question should be positive.
-<P>Multiple-answer questions allow one or more answers to be chosen - each answer
+<p>Multiple-answer questions allow one or more answers to be chosen - each answer
may carry a positive or negative grade, so that choosing ALL the options
will not necessarily result in good grade. If the total grade is negative
then the total grade for this question will be zero. Careful, it is
possible to create questions that have scores greater than 100%.
-<P>Finally, each answer (right or wrong) should include feedback - this feedback
+<p>Finally, each answer (right or wrong) should include feedback - this feedback
will be shown to the respondent next to each of their answers (if the quiz
itself is configured to show feedback).
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Numerical questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Numerical questions</b></p>
<p>From the student perspective, a numerical question looks just
- like a short-answer question.</P>
+ like a short-answer question.</p>
<p>The difference is that numerical answers are allowed
to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers
- to be set.</P>
+ to be set.</p>
<p>For example, if the answer is 30 with an accepted error of 5,
then any number between 25 and 35 will be accepted as correct.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Question datasets</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Question datasets</b></p>
<p>A dataset is a collection of data used to create a question
(such as a calculated question), where it is inserted in
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Creating a new question</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Creating a new question</b></p>
-<P>You can add a variety of different types of questions to a category:</P>
+<p>You can add a variety of different types of questions to a category:</p>
-<P><B>Multiple Choice</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
+<p><b>Multiple Choice</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
chooses from multiple answers. There are two types of multiple choice
questions - single answer and multiple answer.
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=multichoice.html&module=quiz">More info about Multiple Choice questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=multichoice.html&module=quiz">More info about Multiple Choice questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Short Answer</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image), the respondent
+<p><b>Short Answer</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image), the respondent
types a word or phrase. There may several possible correct answers,
with different grades. Answers may or may not be sensitive to case.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=shortanswer.html&module=quiz">More info about Short Answer questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=shortanswer.html&module=quiz">More info about Short Answer questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Numerical</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>From the student perspective, a numerical question looks just
+<p><b>Numerical</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>From the student perspective, a numerical question looks just
like a short-answer question.
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed
to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers
to be set.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=numerical.html&module=quiz">More info about Numerical questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=numerical.html&module=quiz">More info about Numerical questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>True/False</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image), the respondent
+<p><b>True/False</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image), the respondent
selects from two options: True or False.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=truefalse.html&module=quiz">More info about True/False questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=truefalse.html&module=quiz">More info about True/False questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Matching</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>A list of sub questions is provided, along with a list of answers. The
+<p><b>Matching</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>A list of sub questions is provided, along with a list of answers. The
respondent must "match" the correct answers with each question.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=match.html&module=quiz">More info about Matching questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=match.html&module=quiz">More info about Matching questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Embedded Answers (Cloze)</B></P>
-<UL>
+<p><b>Embedded Answers (Cloze)</b></p>
+<ul>
<p>These very flexible questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that
has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice,
short answers and numerical answers.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=multianswer.html&module=quiz">More info about Embedded Answers questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=multianswer.html&module=quiz">More info about Embedded Answers questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Random Short-Answer Matching</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>From the student perspective, this looks just like a Matching question.
+<p><b>Random Short-Answer Matching</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>From the student perspective, this looks just like a Matching question.
The difference is that the subquestions are drawn randomly from Short Answer questions
in the current category.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=randomsamatch.html&module=quiz">More info about Matching questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=randomsamatch.html&module=quiz">More info about Matching questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Random</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>A Random question in a quiz is replaced by a randomly-chosen question
+<p><b>Random</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>A Random question in a quiz is replaced by a randomly-chosen question
from the category that was set.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=random.html&module=quiz">More info about Random questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=random.html&module=quiz">More info about Random questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Description</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This is not a real question. It simply prints some text (and possibly graphics)
+<p><b>Description</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This is not a real question. It simply prints some text (and possibly graphics)
without requiring an answer. This can be used to provide some information to
be used by a following group of questions, for example.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=description.html&module=quiz">More info about Description questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=description.html&module=quiz">More info about Description questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Calculated</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>Calculated questions offer a way to create individual numerical questions by the
+<p><b>Calculated</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>Calculated questions offer a way to create individual numerical questions by the
use of wildcards that are substituted with individual values when the quiz is taken.
-</P>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=calculated.html&module=quiz">More info about Calculated questions</a></p>
-</UL>
+</p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=calculated.html&module=quiz">More info about Calculated questions</a></p>
+</ul>
-<p align=center><b>Random Short-Answer Matching questions</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Random Short-Answer Matching questions</b></p>
<p>After an optional introduction, the respondent is presented with
several sub-questions and several jumbled answers. There is one
<p align="center"><b>Each attempt builds on the last</b></p>
-<p>If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to <B>Yes</B>, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows a quiz to be completed over several attempts.</p>
+<p>If multiple attempts are allowed and this setting is set to <b>Yes</b>, then each new attempt contains the results of the previous attempt. This allows a quiz to be completed over several attempts.</p>
-<p>To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select <B>No</B> for this setting.
+<p>To show a fresh quiz on every attempt, select <b>No</b> for this setting.
-<p align=center><b>Require network addresses</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Require network addresses</b></p>
<p>This field is optional.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Allow review once quiz is closed</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Allow review once quiz is closed</b></p>
-<P>If you enable this option, then students will be able to
- review their past attempts at this quiz.</P>
+<p>If you enable this option, then students will be able to
+ review their past attempts at this quiz.</p>
-<P>This is only enabled once the quiz is closed.</P>
+<p>This is only enabled once the quiz is closed.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Short Answer questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Short Answer questions</b></p>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
types a word or short phrase.
-<P>There may be several possible correct answers, each with a different
+<p>There may be several possible correct answers, each with a different
grade. If the "Case sensitive" option is selected, then you can
have different scores for "Word" or "word".
-<P>You can use the asterix character (*) as a <b>wildcard</b> to match
+<p>You can use the asterix character (*) as a <b>wildcard</b> to match
any series of characters. For example, use ran*ing to match any word
or phrase starting with "ran" and ending with "ing". If you really
do want to match an asterisk then use a backslash like this: \*
-<P>Without wildcards the answers are compared exactly, so be careful with your spelling!
+<p>Without wildcards the answers are compared exactly, so be careful with your spelling!
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Shuffle answers</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Shuffle answers</b></p>
<p>If you enable this option, then the order of answers within
each question will be randomly shuffled each time a student
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Shuffle questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Shuffle questions</b></p>
<p>If you enable this option, then the order of questions in
the quiz will be randomly shuffled each time a student attempts
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Opening and closing the quiz</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Opening and closing the quiz</b></p>
-<P>You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts.
+<p>You can specify times when the quiz is accessible for people to make attempts.
-<P>Before the opening time, and after the closing time, the quiz will be unavailable.
+<p>Before the opening time, and after the closing time, the quiz will be unavailable.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>True/False questions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>True/False questions</b></p>
-<P>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
+<p>In response to a question (that may include a image) the respondent
chooses from True or False.
-<P>If feedback is enabled, then the appropriate feedback message is
+<p>If feedback is enabled, then the appropriate feedback message is
shown to the respondent after answering the quiz. For example,
if the correct answer is "False", but they answer "True" (getting
it wrong) then the "True" feedback is shown.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Reading</B></P>\r
-\r
-<P>When reading texts quickly it is often very easy to misunderstand what the \r
- author was trying to say.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>To avoid misunderstanding, read their words carefully and try to see things\r
- from the author's point of view.<P>\r
-\r
-<P>It can also help to think of what the author has NOT said or left in doubt\r
- - this may help you form questions in your own mind.</P> \r
-\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=writing.html">More info about writing</a></p>\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=questions.html">More info about questions</a></p>\r
+<p align="center"><b>Reading</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>When reading texts quickly it is often very easy to misunderstand what the
+
+ author was trying to say.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>To avoid misunderstanding, read their words carefully and try to see things
+
+ from the author's point of view.<p>
+
+
+
+<p>It can also help to think of what the author has NOT said or left in doubt
+
+ - this may help you form questions in your own mind.</p>
+
+
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=writing.html">More info about writing</a></p>
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=questions.html">More info about questions</a></p>
+
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/resource/icon.gif"> <B>Resources</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>Resources are content: information the teacher wants to bring into the
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/resource/icon.gif"> <b>Resources</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>Resources are content: information the teacher wants to bring into the
course. These can be prepared files uploaded to the course
server; pages edited directly in Moodle; or external web pages
- made to appear part of this course.</P>
-</UL>
+ made to appear part of this course.</p>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>About the Richtext HTML editor</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>About the Richtext HTML editor</b></p>
-<P>Availability: <B>
+<p>Availability: <b>
<?php if (!$CFG->htmleditor) {
print_string("htmleditordisabledadmin");
} else if (!$USER->htmleditor) {
print_string("htmleditoravailable");
}
?>
-</B></P>
+</b></p>
-<P>The Richtext HTML editor provides a word-processor interface embedded in your web page to allow you to edit text in an intuitive way, and produces normal HTML code.
+<p>The Richtext HTML editor provides a word-processor interface embedded in your web page to allow you to edit text in an intuitive way, and produces normal HTML code.
-<P>In addition to formatting text, this editor provides a number of extra features you may find useful.
+<p>In addition to formatting text, this editor provides a number of extra features you may find useful.
-<P><B>Paste text in from other Applications</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>You can cut and paste rich text from other Windows applications such as Microsoft Word
+<p><b>Paste text in from other Applications</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>You can cut and paste rich text from other Windows applications such as Microsoft Word
straight into this editor, and your formatting will be preserved. Just use the normal cut and paste
menus in your web browser (or Control-C and Control-V).
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>Inserting images <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/ed_image.gif"></B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>If you have images that are already published on a web site and accessible via a URL, you can include these images in your texts using the "Insert Image" button.
-</UL>
+<p><b>Inserting images <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/ed_image.gif"></b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>If you have images that are already published on a web site and accessible via a URL, you can include these images in your texts using the "Insert Image" button.
+</ul>
-<P><B>Inserting Tables <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/insert_table.gif"></B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>To add layout to your texts, you can use the "Insert Tables" button in the toolbar.
-</UL>
+<p><b>Inserting Tables <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/insert_table.gif"></b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>To add layout to your texts, you can use the "Insert Tables" button in the toolbar.
+</ul>
-<P><B>Inserting Links <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/ed_link.gif"></B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>To make a new link, first type the text that you want to be a link. Then select it and click the link button in the toolbar. Type the URL you want to link to and it's done!
-</UL>
+<p><b>Inserting Links <img border="0" hspace="10" src="lib/editor/images/ed_link.gif"></b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>To make a new link, first type the text that you want to be a link. Then select it and click the link button in the toolbar. Type the URL you want to link to and it's done!
+</ul>
-<P><B>Inserting smilies (emoticons) <img border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"></B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>To embed these small icons in your text, click on the smiley icon in the toolbar. A dialog will pop up that allows you to select from the following smiley icons. (Alternatively, you can just type the corresponding code straight into your text and it will be converted later when your text is displayed).
+<p><b>Inserting smilies (emoticons) <img border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"></b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>To embed these small icons in your text, click on the smiley icon in the toolbar. A dialog will pop up that allows you to select from the following smiley icons. (Alternatively, you can just type the corresponding code straight into your text and it will be converted later when your text is displayed).
<table border="1">
<tr valign="top">
<tr>
<td><img border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>smile</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/biggrin.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>big grin</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-D</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-D</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/wink.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>wink</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>;-)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">;-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/mixed.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>mixed</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-/</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-/</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/thoughtful.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>thoughtful</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>V-.</FONT></td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">V-.</font></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/tongueout.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>tongue out</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-P</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-P</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/cool.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>cool</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>B-)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">B-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/approve.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>approve</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>^-)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">^-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/wideeyes.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>wide eyes</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>8-)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">8-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/surprise.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>surprise</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>8-o</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">8-o</td>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/sad.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>sad</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-(</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-(</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/shy.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>shy</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>8-.</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">8-.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/blush.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>blush</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-I</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-I</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/kiss.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>kisses</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:-X</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:-X</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/clown.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>clown</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>:o)</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">:o)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/blackeye.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>black eye</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>P-|</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">P-|</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/angry.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>angry</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>8-[</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">8-[</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/dead.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>dead</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>xx-P</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">xx-P</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/sleepy.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>sleepy</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>|-.</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">|-.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/evil.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>evil</td>
- <td NOWRAP><FONT FACE=Courier>}-]</td>
+ <td NOWRAP><font face="Courier">}-]</td>
</tr>
</table>
</table>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<p><img valign=absmiddle src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/scorm/icon.gif"> <b>SCORM packages</b></p>
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/scorm/icon.gif"> <b>SCORM packages</b></p>
<ul>
<p>A SCORM package is a bundle of web content packaged in a way that follows
the SCORM standard for learning objects.
-<p align=center><b>Topic/Week summaries</b></p>\r
-\r
-<p>The idea of a topic summary is a very short text to prepare students\r
- for the activities within this topic (or week).</p>\r
-\r
-<p>Each summary should be very short so that the course page doesn't become too long.</p>\r
-\r
-<p>If you find yourself wanting to say more than a sentence or two then \r
- consider adding a resource to this topic instead (for example, the first activity\r
- might be a page called <b>About This Topic</b>).</p>\r
+<p align="center"><b>Topic/Week summaries</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>The idea of a topic summary is a very short text to prepare students
+
+ for the activities within this topic (or week).</p>
+
+
+
+<p>Each summary should be very short so that the course page doesn't become too long.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>If you find yourself wanting to say more than a sentence or two then
+
+ consider adding a resource to this topic instead (for example, the first activity
+
+ might be a page called <b>About This Topic</b>).</p>
+
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/survey/icon.gif"> <B>Surveys</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>The Survey module provides a number of verified survey instruments that
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/survey/icon.gif"> <b>Surveys</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>The Survey module provides a number of verified survey instruments that
have been found useful in assessing and stimulating learning in
online environments. Teachers can use these to gather data from their
students that will help them learn about their class and reflect
- on their own teaching.</P>
-</UL>
+ on their own teaching.</p>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Available surveys</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Available surveys</b></p>
-<P>Currently, Moodle only offers specific types of surveys (future versions
-will enable you to create your own).</P>
+<p>Currently, Moodle only offers specific types of surveys (future versions
+will enable you to create your own).</p>
-<P>The available surveys have been chosen as being particularly useful for
+<p>The available surveys have been chosen as being particularly useful for
evaluating online learning environments that use a constructivist pedagogy.
They are useful to identify certain trends that may be happening among
your participants.
(To see a paper where these are used in a detailed analysis, see:
-<A TARGET=paper HREF="http://dougiamas.com/writing/herdsa2002">http://dougiamas.com/writing/herdsa2002</A>)</P>
+<a target="paper" href="http://dougiamas.com/writing/herdsa2002">http://dougiamas.com/writing/herdsa2002</a>)</p>
-<HR>
-<P><B>COLLES - Constructivist On-Line Learning Environment Survey</B></P>
-<UL>
+<hr />
+<p><b>COLLES - Constructivist On-Line Learning Environment Survey</b></p>
+<ul>
<p>The COLLES comprises an economical 24 statements grouped into six scales,
each of which helps us address a key question about the quality of the on-line
learning environment: </p>
-<table BORDER="0" CELLSPACING="10" CELLPADDING="10">
+<table border="0" cellspacing="10" cellpadding="10">
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Relevance</td>
+ <td valign="top">Relevance</td>
<td>How relevant is on-line learning to students' professional practices?
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Reflection </td>
+ <td valign="top">Reflection </td>
<td>Does on-line learning stimulate students' critical reflective thinking?
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Interactivity </td>
+ <td valign="top">Interactivity </td>
<td>To what extent do students engage on-line in rich educative dialogue?
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Tutor Support</td>
+ <td valign="top">Tutor Support</td>
<td>How well do tutors enable students to participate in on-line learning?
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Peer Support </td>
+ <td valign="top">Peer Support </td>
<td>Is sensitive and encouraging support provided on-line by fellow students?
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
- <td valign=top>Interpretation </td>
+ <td valign="top">Interpretation </td>
<td>Do students and tutors make good sense of each other's on-line communications?</td>
</tr>
to monitor the extent to which you are able to exploit the interactive capacity
of the World Wide Web for engaging students in dynamic learning practices. </p>
-<P>
+<p>
(This information has been adapted from the COLLES page. You can find out more about
COLLES and the authors of it at:
-<A TARGET=paper HREF="http://surveylearning.com/colles/">http://surveylearning.com/colles/</A>)</P>
-</UL>
+<a target="paper" href="http://surveylearning.com/colles/">http://surveylearning.com/colles/</a>)</p>
+</ul>
-<HR>
-<P><B>ATTLS - Attitudes to Thinking and Learning Survey</B></P>
-<UL>
+<hr />
+<p><b>ATTLS - Attitudes to Thinking and Learning Survey</b></p>
+<ul>
-<P>The theory of 'ways of knowing', originally from the field of gender research (Belenky et al., 1986) provides us with a survey tool to examine the quality of discourse within a collaborative environment.
+<p>The theory of 'ways of knowing', originally from the field of gender research (Belenky et al., 1986) provides us with a survey tool to examine the quality of discourse within a collaborative environment.
-<P>The Attitudes Towards Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS) is an instrument developed by Galotti et al. (1999) to measure the extent to which a person is a 'connected knower' (CK) or a 'separate knower' (SK).
+<p>The Attitudes Towards Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS) is an instrument developed by Galotti et al. (1999) to measure the extent to which a person is a 'connected knower' (CK) or a 'separate knower' (SK).
-<P>People with higher CK scores tend to find learning more enjoyable, and are often more cooperative, congenial and more willing to build on the ideas of others, while those with higher SK scores tend to take a more critical and argumentative stance to learning.
+<p>People with higher CK scores tend to find learning more enjoyable, and are often more cooperative, congenial and more willing to build on the ideas of others, while those with higher SK scores tend to take a more critical and argumentative stance to learning.
-<P>Studies have shown that these two learning styles are independent of each other (Galotti et al., 1999; Galotti et al., 2001). Additionally, they are only a reflection of learning attitudes, not learning capacities or intellectual power.
+<p>Studies have shown that these two learning styles are independent of each other (Galotti et al., 1999; Galotti et al., 2001). Additionally, they are only a reflection of learning attitudes, not learning capacities or intellectual power.
-<P><I>Belenky, M. F., Clinchy, B. M., Goldberger, N. R., & Tarule, J. M. (1986). Women's Ways of Knowing: The Development of Self, Voice, and Mind. New York: Basic Books, Inc. </I></P>
+<p><i>Belenky, M. F., Clinchy, B. M., Goldberger, N. R., & Tarule, J. M. (1986). Women's Ways of Knowing: The Development of Self, Voice, and Mind. New York: Basic Books, Inc. </i></p>
-<P><I>Galotti, K. M., Clinchy, B. M., Ainsworth, K., Lavin, B., & Mansfield, A. F. (1999). A New Way of Assessing Ways of Knowing: The Attitudes Towards Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS). Sex Roles, 40(9/10), 745-766.</I></P>
+<p><i>Galotti, K. M., Clinchy, B. M., Ainsworth, K., Lavin, B., & Mansfield, A. F. (1999). A New Way of Assessing Ways of Knowing: The Attitudes Towards Thinking and Learning Survey (ATTLS). Sex Roles, 40(9/10), 745-766.</i></p>
-<P><I>Galotti, K. M., Reimer, R. L., & Drebus, D. W. (2001). Ways of knowing as learning styles: Learning MAGIC with a partner. Sex Roles, 44(7/8), 419-436.</I></P>
+<p><i>Galotti, K. M., Reimer, R. L., & Drebus, D. W. (2001). Ways of knowing as learning styles: Learning MAGIC with a partner. Sex Roles, 44(7/8), 419-436.</i></p>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Teachers</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Teachers</b></p>
-<P>This page shows the list of people who are assigned to be
+<p>This page shows the list of people who are assigned to be
"teachers" in this course (by the system administrator).
</p>
-<P>You can use this form to assign a role (title) to each person
+<p>You can use this form to assign a role (title) to each person
such as "Professor", "Tutor", "Assistant" and so on. These
will appear on the site's course listing and also on the
list of participants for your course. If you leave the
(the one you set in the Course Settings page).
</p>
-<P>You can also order this list (to put the main teacher at the
+<p>You can also order this list (to put the main teacher at the
top, for example). Simply select numbers from the menus
in the "Order" column. After pressing "Save changes" you will
see the new order.
</p>
-<P>A special case occurs if you use select "Hide"
+<p>A special case occurs if you use select "Hide"
for a teacher. In this case, the teacher will
NOT BE SHOWN on the course listings or the list of
participants. They will be "hidden" from students
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Help on writing text</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Help on writing text</b></p>
Writing text in Moodle works pretty much the way you would expect, but you also have the ability to include "smilies", "URL addresses" and some HTML tags in your text.
-<P><B>Smilies (emoticons)</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>To embed these small icons in your text, just type the associated code. These codes themselves are like little pictures if you turn your head to the left when looking at them.</P>
+<p><b>Smilies (emoticons)</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>To embed these small icons in your text, just type the associated code. These codes themselves are like little pictures if you turn your head to the left when looking at them.</p>
<table border="1">
<tr valign="top">
<tr>
<td><img border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/smiley.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>smile</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/biggrin.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>big grin</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-D</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-D</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/wink.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>wink</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>;-)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">;-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/mixed.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>mixed</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-/</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-/</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/thoughtful.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>thoughtful</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>V-.</FONT></td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">V-.</font></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/tongueout.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>tongue out</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-P</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-P</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/cool.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>cool</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>B-)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">B-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/approve.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>approve</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>^-)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">^-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/wideeyes.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>wide eyes</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>8-)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">8-)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/surprise.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>surprise</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>8-o</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">8-o</td>
</tr>
</table>
</td>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/sad.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>sad</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-(</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-(</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/shy.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>shy</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>8-.</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">8-.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/blush.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>blush</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-I</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-I</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/kiss.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>kisses</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:-X</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:-X</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/clown.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>clown</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>:o)</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">:o)</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/blackeye.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>black eye</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>P-|</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">P-|</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/angry.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>angry</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>8-[</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">8-[</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/dead.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>dead</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>xx-P</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">xx-P</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/sleepy.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>sleepy</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>|-.</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">|-.</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td><img alt border="0" hspace="10" src="pix/s/evil.gif" width="15" height="15"></td>
<td>evil</td>
- <td><FONT FACE=Courier>}-]</td>
+ <td><font face="Courier">}-]</td>
</tr>
</table>
</table>
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>URLs</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>Any "word" starting with <B>www.</B> or <B>http://</B> will automatically be turned into a clickable link.
-<P>For example: <A HREF="http://www.yahoo.com">www.yahoo.com</A> or <A HREF="http://curtin.edu">http://curtin.edu</A>
-</UL>
+<p><b>URLs</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>Any "word" starting with <b>www.</b> or <b>http://</b> will automatically be turned into a clickable link.
+<p>For example: <a href="http://www.yahoo.com">www.yahoo.com</a> or <a href="http://curtin.edu">http://curtin.edu</a>
+</ul>
-<P><B>HTML tags</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>You can use a limited subset of HTML tags to add emphasis to your texts.
-<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLPADDING=5 CELLSPACING=5>
-<TR><TH>HTML tags<TH>Produces</TR>
-<TR><TD><B> bold </B> <TD> <B>bold text</B> </TR>
-<TR><TD><I> italic </I> <TD> <I>italic text</I> </TR>
-<TR><TD><U> underline </U> <TD> <U>underlined text</U> </TR>
-<TR><TD><FONT SIZE=1> small </FONT> <TD> <FONT SIZE=1>small</FONT> </TR>
-<TR><TD><FONT SIZE=4> large </FONT> <TD> <FONT SIZE=4>large</FONT> </TR>
-<TR><TD><FONT COLOR=green> example </FONT> <TD> <FONT color=green>example</FONT> </TR>
-<TR><TD valign=top><UL><LI>one <LI>two </UL> <TD valign=top> <UL><LI>one<LI>two</UL> </TR>
-<TR><TD><HR><TD> <HR> </TR>
-</TABLE>
-</UL>
+<p><b>HTML tags</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>You can use a limited subset of HTML tags to add emphasis to your texts.
+<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="5">
+<tr><th>HTML tags<th>Produces</tr>
+<tr><td><B> bold </B> <td> <b>bold text</b> </tr>
+<tr><td><I> italic </I> <td> <i>italic text</i> </tr>
+<tr><td><U> underline </U> <td> <u>underlined text</u> </tr>
+<tr><td><FONT size=1> small </FONT> <td> <font size="1">small</font> </tr>
+<tr><td><FONT size=4> large </FONT> <td> <font size="4">large</font> </tr>
+<tr><td><FONT color=green> example </FONT> <td> <font color="green">example</font> </tr>
+<tr><td valign="top"><UL><LI>one <LI>two </UL> <td valign="top"> <ul><li>one<li>two</ul> </tr>
+<tr><td><HR><td> <hr /> </tr>
+</table>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Formatting text</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Formatting text</b></p>
-<P>When writing text in Moodle there are several formats you can choose
+<p>When writing text in Moodle there are several formats you can choose
to produce your text, depending on your expertise and the type of browser
you are using.
-<P><B>Usually you can just leave this setting to the default value and things
- should work as you expect</B>.
+<p><b>Usually you can just leave this setting to the default value and things
+ should work as you expect</b>.
-<P><B>1. Moodle auto-format</B></P>
+<p><b>1. Moodle auto-format</b></p>
-<UL>
-<P>This format is best for when you are using normal web forms for entry
+<ul>
+<p>This format is best for when you are using normal web forms for entry
(instead of the Richtext HTML editor). Just type text normally, as if you
were sending an email.
-<P>When you save your text, Moodle will do a number of things to automatically
+<p>When you save your text, Moodle will do a number of things to automatically
format your text for you.
-<P>For example, URLs such as
- <A HREF="http://yahoo.com/">http://yahoo.com</A> or even
- <A HREF="http://www.yahoo.com/">www.yahoo.com</A> will be turned into links.
-<P>Your line breaks will be retained, and blank lines will start new paragraphs.
-<P>Smiley characters such as :-) will automatically become their graphical equivalents.
-<P>You can even embed HTML code if you want to and it will be retained.
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=text.html">More info about Moodle auto-formatting</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p>For example, URLs such as
+ <a href="http://yahoo.com/">http://yahoo.com</a> or even
+ <a href="http://www.yahoo.com/">www.yahoo.com</a> will be turned into links.
+<p>Your line breaks will be retained, and blank lines will start new paragraphs.
+<p>Smiley characters such as :-) will automatically become their graphical equivalents.
+<p>You can even embed HTML code if you want to and it will be retained.
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=text.html">More info about Moodle auto-formatting</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>2. HTML format</B></P>
+<p><b>2. HTML format</b></p>
-<UL>
-<P>This format assumes the text is pure HTML. If you are using the
+<ul>
+<p>This format assumes the text is pure HTML. If you are using the
HTML editor to edit text then this is the default format - all
the commands in the toolbar are producing HTML for you.
-<P>Even if you are not using the Richtext HTML editor, you can use HTML code
+<p>Even if you are not using the Richtext HTML editor, you can use HTML code
in your text and it should come out exactly as you intended.
-<P>Unlike the Moodle auto-format, no automatic formatting is performed.
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=html.html">More info about HTML in Moodle</a></p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=richtext.html">More info about the Richtext HTML editor</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p>Unlike the Moodle auto-format, no automatic formatting is performed.
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=html.html">More info about HTML in Moodle</a></p>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=richtext.html">More info about the Richtext HTML editor</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>3. Plain text format</B></P>
+<p><b>3. Plain text format</b></p>
-<UL>
-<P>This format is useful when you need to include lots of code
+<ul>
+<p>This format is useful when you need to include lots of code
or HTML that you want to be displayed exactly as you wrote it.
-<P>It still translates spaces and new lines, but otherwise your
+<p>It still translates spaces and new lines, but otherwise your
text isn't touched.
-</UL>
+</ul>
-<P><B>4. Markdown text format</B></P>
+<p><b>4. Markdown text format</b></p>
-<UL>
-<P>Markdown format tries to make it easy as possible to type
+<ul>
+<p>Markdown format tries to make it easy as possible to type
well-formatted XHTML pages using nothing but text written
more or less like you would write an email.</p>
<p>It's very good for writing clean text pages with some headings
and some lists but without many links or images.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=markdown.html">More info about the Markdown format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=markdown.html">More info about the Markdown format</a></p>
+</ul>
-<P><B>5. Wiki-like text format</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>This format uses special codes for typing text known as the
+<p><b>5. Wiki-like text format</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>This format uses special codes for typing text known as the
Wiki way. If you already know the Wiki way of creating pages
and want to use it everywhere in Moodle, then this format is
for you.</p>
-<P>Note that this isn't a <b>real</b> Wiki, so you can't use CamelCase
+<p>Note that this isn't a <b>real</b> Wiki, so you can't use CamelCase
for creating new pages. It may also be slightly different from the
Wiki module in Moodle, so be aware.</p>
-<p align=
right><a href="help.php?file=wiki.html">More info about the Wiki format</a></p>
-</UL>
+<p align=
"right"><a href="help.php?file=wiki.html">More info about the Wiki format</a></p>
+</ul>
<p>Here is an example of a valid import file:</p>
-<p><font size="-1" face="Courier New, Courier, mono">username, password, firstname, lastname, email, lang, idnumber, maildisplay, course1, group1<br>
-jonest, verysecret, Tom, Jones, jonest@someplace.edu, en, 3663737, 1, Intro101, Section 1<br>
+<p><font size="-1" face="Courier New, Courier, mono">username, password, firstname, lastname, email, lang, idnumber, maildisplay, course1, group1<br />
+jonest, verysecret, Tom, Jones, jonest@someplace.edu, en, 3663737, 1, Intro101, Section 1<br />
reznort, somesecret, Trent, Reznor, reznort@someplace.edu, en_us, 6736733, 0, Advanced202, Section 3</font></p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Check Links</B></P>
-<P>This tool checks all http:// links for availability, and afterwards resaves the
- wiki page with the dead links marked for easier editing.</P>
+<p align="center"><b>Check Links</b></p>
+<p>This tool checks all http:// links for availability, and afterwards resaves the
+ wiki page with the dead links marked for easier editing.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Allow Binary Files</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Allow Binary Files</b></p>
-<P>If you allow binary content (such as images), you have two possibilities:<BR>
-<OL>
- <LI>You can upload and use images on wiki-pages. When editing a page, an upload form will be displayed
+<p>If you allow binary content (such as images), you have two possibilities:<br />
+<ol>
+ <li>You can upload and use images on wiki-pages. When editing a page, an upload form will be displayed
for uploading images. After a successful upload, an image code is displayed that you can embed in
- your pages using square brackets. For example: [internal://myimage.gif].</LI>
+ your pages using square brackets. For example: [internal://myimage.gif].</li>
- <LI>You can attach files to a Wiki Page which can be displayed by the <i>attachments</i> action.
- The size is limited to the setting made in Moodle.</LI>
-</OL>
-</P>
+ <li>You can attach files to a Wiki Page which can be displayed by the <i>attachments</i> action.
+ The size is limited to the setting made in Moodle.</li>
+</ol>
+</p>
-<h2>How To Wiki</h2>\r
-<p>\r
-Moodle's wiki is based on\r
-<a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net/?id=ErfurtWiki" target="_blank">ErfurtWiki</a>,\r
-which is an implementation of the \r
-<a href="http://c2.com/cgi/wiki?WikiWikiWeb" target="_blank">WikiWikiWeb</a>\r
-hypertext system. It allows simple collaborative editing and creation of web pages.</p>\r
-<p>\r
-<ul>\r
-<li>learn how to <a href="#createpages">CreatePages</a></li>\r
-<li>just click on <img src="pix/t/edit.gif"> or select "Edit this page" from the drop down menu to change the contents of a page</li>\r
-<li>you can format your pages wth <a href="#wikimarkup">Wiki Markup</a>, or with HTML (if the wiki has been given that option)</li>\r
-<li>SearchPages or go to the list of NewestPages</li>\r
-<li>there are also lists of the MostVisitedPages, MostOftenChangedPages and recently UpdatedPages</li>\r
-</ul>\r
-</p>\r
-<p>\r
-<a name="createpages"></a><b>Create Pages</b>:<br />\r
-You create a page by naming it in the text of an existing page. A wiki page is named using\r
-<a href="#camelcase">CamelCase</a> or by enclosing it in square brackets ( [] ).</p>\r
-<p>\r
-For example:\r
-<ul>\r
-<li>MyWikiPage (Camel Case)</li>\r
-<li>[My Wiki Page] (enclosed in square brackets)</li>\r
-</ul></p>\r
-<p>\r
-Text that has been given a wiki page name will have a '?' after it. Clicking on the '?', will\r
-enter edit mode for that page. Enter your text, save and you have a new wiki page.</p>\r
-<p><a name="wikimarkup"></a><b>Wiki Markup</b>:<br />\r
-Each page inside a Wiki can be edited easily, using wiki markup.\r
-</p>\r
-<h4> Paragraphs</h4>\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> separate paragraphs inside the text with empty lines</li>\r
- <li> use three percent signs %%<em></em>% to enforce a line break</li>\r
- <li> if you prepend text with spaces or tabs it will get indented </li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4> !! Headlines</h4>\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> use an exclamation mark ! at the beginning of a line to create a small headline</li>\r
- <li> !! for medium</li>\r
- <li> !!! for large headlines </li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4> text style</h4>\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> if you want to <em>emphasize text</em> enclose it in two single-quotes '' (usually looks italic)</li>\r
- <li> <strong>text gets bold</strong> with two underscores __ (or if enclosed with two asterisks **)</li>\r
- <li> to make <big>text big</big> enclose it in hash characters ##</li>\r
- <li> you can get <small> smaller text </small> using "µµ" likewise</li>\r
- <li> a <tt>typewrite like font</tt> will be used if you enclose text in two equal == signs </li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4> Lists</h4>\r
-\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> start a line with an asterisk * to begin a list</li>\r
- <li> use # instead for numerated lists\r
- <ol>\r
- <li> you can create sublists</li>\r
- <li> subsequent list points should start with the same mix of * and # </li>\r
- </ol>\r
- </li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4> HyperLinks</h4>\r
-\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> just enter a CamelCase WikiWord inside your text to create a new HyperLink</li>\r
- <li> or, enclose some <b>words in square brackets</b> to create a HyperLink</li>\r
- <li> any valid internet address (starting with <a href="http://">http://</a>) like http://www.example.com/ inside the text will be made clickable automagically</li>\r
- <li> enclose a www address or a WikiLink inside square brackets [<a href="http://www.moodle.org/">Moodle</a>] and assign it a neat title using quotation marks or the | character\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> [title | http://example.com]</li>\r
- <li> [WikiWord "title"] or ["title for" WikiLink] </li>\r
- </ul>\r
- </li>\r
- <li> if you don't want a WikiWord or a !http://www-address (or [anything] inside square brackets) to become a HyperLink then just prepend it with a exclamation mark or a tilde\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> !NoHyperLink, ~NoHyperLink</li>\r
- <li> ![no hyperlink], !!http://nolink.org/ </li>\r
- </ul>\r
- </li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4> Tables with |</h4>\r
-<table cellpadding="2" border="1" cellspacing="0">\r
-<tr>\r
-<td> just enclose </td>\r
-<td> things with the dash </td>\r
-<td> character </td>\r
-</tr><tr>\r
-<td> to build a </td>\r
-<td> table structure </td>\r
-</tr><tr>\r
-<td> browsers usually </td>\r
-<td> leave out the missing </td>\r
-<td> cells </td>\r
-</tr>\r
-</table>\r
-\r
-\r
-<p>\r
-Please always put an empty line before and after a table, so it stands out from other text in its own paragraph.\r
-</p>\r
-\r
-<h4> Pictures</h4>\r
-\r
- <ul type="circle">\r
- <li> to include an image into a page enclose its absolute www-address in square brackets, like [http://www.example.com/pics/image.png] </li>\r
- <li> alternatively you could use the ImageUploading function</li>\r
- </ul>\r
-\r
-<h4>Further readings</h4>\r
-There are more possibilities for Wiki mark-up. Please consult the <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target=_new>Erfurt Wiki Homepage</a> for more information.\r
-\r
-<p>\r
-<a name="camelcase"></a><b>Camel Case</b>:<br />\r
-CamelCase describes what WikiWords look like. Multiple words, joined together without\r
-spaces, separated by changes in case. The uppercase and\r
-lowercase letters show up like the humps of camels.</p>\r
-<p>\r
-This linking scheme is often also called BumpyText.</p>\r
-<p>\r
-While language purists hate Wikis for that naming scheme, it is very common in the \r
-computing world and well known to most programmers.</p>\r
-\r
-\r
+<h2>How To Wiki</h2>
+
+<p>
+
+Moodle's wiki is based on
+
+<a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net/?id=ErfurtWiki" target="_blank">ErfurtWiki</a>,
+
+which is an implementation of the
+
+<a href="http://c2.com/cgi/wiki?WikiWikiWeb" target="_blank">WikiWikiWeb</a>
+
+hypertext system. It allows simple collaborative editing and creation of web pages.</p>
+
+<p>
+
+<ul>
+
+<li>learn how to <a href="#createpages">CreatePages</a></li>
+
+<li>just click on <img src="pix/t/edit.gif"> or select "Edit this page" from the drop down menu to change the contents of a page</li>
+
+<li>you can format your pages wth <a href="#wikimarkup">Wiki Markup</a>, or with HTML (if the wiki has been given that option)</li>
+
+<li>SearchPages or go to the list of NewestPages</li>
+
+<li>there are also lists of the MostVisitedPages, MostOftenChangedPages and recently UpdatedPages</li>
+
+</ul>
+
+</p>
+
+<p>
+
+<a name="createpages"></a><b>Create Pages</b>:<br />
+
+You create a page by naming it in the text of an existing page. A wiki page is named using
+
+<a href="#camelcase">CamelCase</a> or by enclosing it in square brackets ( [] ).</p>
+
+<p>
+
+For example:
+
+<ul>
+
+<li>MyWikiPage (Camel Case)</li>
+
+<li>[My Wiki Page] (enclosed in square brackets)</li>
+
+</ul></p>
+
+<p>
+
+Text that has been given a wiki page name will have a '?' after it. Clicking on the '?', will
+
+enter edit mode for that page. Enter your text, save and you have a new wiki page.</p>
+
+<p><a name="wikimarkup"></a><b>Wiki Markup</b>:<br />
+
+Each page inside a Wiki can be edited easily, using wiki markup.
+
+</p>
+
+<h4> Paragraphs</h4>
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> separate paragraphs inside the text with empty lines</li>
+
+ <li> use three percent signs %%<em></em>% to enforce a line break</li>
+
+ <li> if you prepend text with spaces or tabs it will get indented </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4> !! Headlines</h4>
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> use an exclamation mark ! at the beginning of a line to create a small headline</li>
+
+ <li> !! for medium</li>
+
+ <li> !!! for large headlines </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4> text style</h4>
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> if you want to <em>emphasize text</em> enclose it in two single-quotes '' (usually looks italic)</li>
+
+ <li> <strong>text gets bold</strong> with two underscores __ (or if enclosed with two asterisks **)</li>
+
+ <li> to make <big>text big</big> enclose it in hash characters ##</li>
+
+ <li> you can get <small> smaller text </small> using "µµ" likewise</li>
+
+ <li> a <tt>typewrite like font</tt> will be used if you enclose text in two equal == signs </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4> Lists</h4>
+
+
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> start a line with an asterisk * to begin a list</li>
+
+ <li> use # instead for numerated lists
+
+ <ol>
+
+ <li> you can create sublists</li>
+
+ <li> subsequent list points should start with the same mix of * and # </li>
+
+ </ol>
+
+ </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4> HyperLinks</h4>
+
+
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> just enter a CamelCase WikiWord inside your text to create a new HyperLink</li>
+
+ <li> or, enclose some <b>words in square brackets</b> to create a HyperLink</li>
+
+ <li> any valid internet address (starting with <a href="http://">http://</a>) like http://www.example.com/ inside the text will be made clickable automagically</li>
+
+ <li> enclose a www address or a WikiLink inside square brackets [<a href="http://www.moodle.org/">Moodle</a>] and assign it a neat title using quotation marks or the | character
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> [title | http://example.com]</li>
+
+ <li> [WikiWord "title"] or ["title for" WikiLink] </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+ </li>
+
+ <li> if you don't want a WikiWord or a !http://www-address (or [anything] inside square brackets) to become a HyperLink then just prepend it with a exclamation mark or a tilde
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> !NoHyperLink, ~NoHyperLink</li>
+
+ <li> ![no hyperlink], !!http://nolink.org/ </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+ </li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4> Tables with |</h4>
+
+<table cellpadding="2" border="1" cellspacing="0">
+
+<tr>
+
+<td> just enclose </td>
+
+<td> things with the dash </td>
+
+<td> character </td>
+
+</tr><tr>
+
+<td> to build a </td>
+
+<td> table structure </td>
+
+</tr><tr>
+
+<td> browsers usually </td>
+
+<td> leave out the missing </td>
+
+<td> cells </td>
+
+</tr>
+
+</table>
+
+
+
+
+
+<p>
+
+Please always put an empty line before and after a table, so it stands out from other text in its own paragraph.
+
+</p>
+
+
+
+<h4> Pictures</h4>
+
+
+
+ <ul type="circle">
+
+ <li> to include an image into a page enclose its absolute www-address in square brackets, like [http://www.example.com/pics/image.png] </li>
+
+ <li> alternatively you could use the ImageUploading function</li>
+
+ </ul>
+
+
+
+<h4>Further readings</h4>
+
+There are more possibilities for Wiki mark-up. Please consult the <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target="_new">Erfurt Wiki Homepage</a> for more information.
+
+
+
+<p>
+
+<a name="camelcase"></a><b>Camel Case</b>:<br />
+
+CamelCase describes what WikiWords look like. Multiple words, joined together without
+
+spaces, separated by changes in case. The uppercase and
+
+lowercase letters show up like the humps of camels.</p>
+
+<p>
+
+This linking scheme is often also called BumpyText.</p>
+
+<p>
+
+While language purists hate Wikis for that naming scheme, it is very common in the
+
+computing world and well known to most programmers.</p>
+
+
+
+
+
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>HTML Mode</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>HTML Mode</b></p>
-<P>You have the following possibilities:
+<p>You have the following possibilities:
<dl>
<dt>No HTML</dt>
<dd>Escapes all HTML-Tags. Formatting is done through the WikiWords. Filters work in this Mode.</dd>
<dd>No WikiWords, just HTML. This option allows the use of the HTML-Editor.</dd>
</dl>
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Fill in initial content</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Fill in initial content</b></p>
-<P>This is the content which can be initially filled into the Wiki.</P>
-<P>If you want your own initial content, create it as text-files, and upload it to a directory in the course
+<p>This is the content which can be initially filled into the Wiki.</p>
+<p>If you want your own initial content, create it as text-files, and upload it to a directory in the course
files area. Then select one of the files as the initial page. All pages in that directory will become content
for every new wiki structure created for this wiki, and the selected page will be the first page.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/wiki/icon.gif"> <B>Wikis</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>A Wiki enables documents to be authored collectively in a simple markup language using a web browser.</P>
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/wiki/icon.gif"> <b>Wikis</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>A Wiki enables documents to be authored collectively in a simple markup language using a web browser.</p>
-<P>"Wiki wiki" means "super fast" in the Hawaiian language, and it is the speed of creating and
+<p>"Wiki wiki" means "super fast" in the Hawaiian language, and it is the speed of creating and
updating pages that is one of the defining aspects of wiki technology. Generally, there is no
prior review before modifications are accepted, and most wikis are open to the general
- public or at least to all persons who also have access to the wiki server.</P>
+ public or at least to all persons who also have access to the wiki server.</p>
-<P>The Moodle Wiki module enables participants to work together on web pages to add,
- expand and change the content. Old versions are never deleted and can be restored.</P>
+<p>The Moodle Wiki module enables participants to work together on web pages to add,
+ expand and change the content. Old versions are never deleted and can be restored.</p>
-<P>This module is based on <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target=_new>Erfurt Wiki</a>.</P>
-</UL>
+<p>This module is based on <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target="_new">Erfurt Wiki</a>.</p>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Remove Pages</B></P>
-<P>This function allows you to remove wiki pages. A quick check is done and pages with errors are shown.</P>
-<P>Please take care and think twice before removing a page. Usually it is not necessary.</P>
+<p align="center"><b>Remove Pages</b></p>
+<p>This function allows you to remove wiki pages. A quick check is done and pages with errors are shown.</p>
+<p>Please take care and think twice before removing a page. Usually it is not necessary.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Author for reverting mass changes</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Author for reverting mass changes</b></p>
+<p>
This must be a fixed string (you cannot use * or regex), at
best use the attackers` IP address or host name.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Revert Pages</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Revert Pages</b></p>
-<P>If someone makes a mess of many pages in your Wiki, you may want to automatically revert those changes by
- deleting all page versions that carry a certain string in the {author} field (usually the IP address or host name)</P>
+<p>If someone makes a mess of many pages in your Wiki, you may want to automatically revert those changes by
+ deleting all page versions that carry a certain string in the {author} field (usually the IP address or host name)</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Set Page Flags</B></P>
-<P>Flags are assigned to a wiki page and allow to change the type or behavior.</P>
+<p align="center"><b>Set Page Flags</b></p>
+<p>Flags are assigned to a wiki page and allow to change the type or behavior.</p>
-<P>Flag description:</P>
+<p>Flag description:</p>
<table border="1" width="100%"><tbody>
<tr><td valign="top" width="25%">TXT</td><td>The page contains text.</td></tr>
<tr><td valign="top" width="25%">BIN</td><td>The page contains binary data.</td></tr>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Strip Pages</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Strip Pages</b></p>
-<P>This function purges old versions of all pages stored in the database and just keeps the newest versions.</P>
+<p>This function purges old versions of all pages stored in the database and just keeps the newest versions.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Student Administration Options</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Student Administration Options</b></p>
-<P>Certain administration options can be turned 'on' or 'off' for students. When 'on', these options only
+<p>Certain administration options can be turned 'on' or 'off' for students. When 'on', these options only
take affect for wikis that can be edited by the student. When 'off', they will not appear in the administrator
menu.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Wiki Auto-linking Options</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Wiki Auto-linking Options</b></p>
-<P>In certain situations, you may not want automatic linking based on CamelCase words.
+<p>In certain situations, you may not want automatic linking based on CamelCase words.
If this is so, check this box to disable CamelCase linking.
</p>
<p>
<b>WARNING</b> -- CamelCase is a standard wiki feature, and disabling it may cause other
imported wikis to work incorrectly. Use this feature <i>only</i> if you are absolutely certain
you do not want CamelCase linking.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Initial Page Name for wiki</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Initial Page Name for wiki</b></p>
+<p>
If you want the first wiki page name to be something other than the
wiki name, you can specify it here. This name will become the first
-page of the wiki for every created instance of this wiki.<br><br>
+page of the wiki for every created instance of this wiki.<br /><br />
If you leave this field blank, the initial page name will be the wiki name, unless you select
a page in the 'initial page' field.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Wiki types</B></P>
-<P>
+<p align="center"><b>Wiki types</b></p>
+<p>
There are three wiki types: Teacher, Groups, Student. In addition,
like any activity, the wiki has the Moodle group modes: "No Groups" "Separate Groups" and "Visible Groups".
Unless the group mode has been forced by the course settings, it can be set with the groups icons on the course home page after the wiki has been created.
-<UL>
+<ul>
<li>A teacher can always edit every wiki in the course</li>
-</UL>
-</P>
+</ul>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Wiki Usage</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Wiki Usage</b></p>
<p>
-<br>
+<br />
Wiki is a platform for working together on constructing web pages. The principles are simple.
-<br><br>
+<br /><br />
<ul>
<li>A text is written and saved.</li>
<li>Later, another person may read that text and think of some additions or
corrections that could be made. They choose "Edit" and make their changes to the page. </li>
-<li>After saving their new version, it is available globally.</li><br> <br>
+<li>After saving their new version, it is available globally.</li><br /> <br />
</ul>
With a wiki, it is also easily possible to add a page or link to existing pages.
-<br><br>
+<br /><br />
<ul>
<li>A link is created by a WikiWord. This is one word with at least two capital letters. If a page with this name already exist, it will be linked automatically, if not, it will be displayed with a question mark.</li>
<li>Clicking on this question mark, will start a new blank page with that name, ready to edit.</li>
</ul>
-<br><br>
+<br /><br />
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B><br>
-Wiki formatting rules</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b><br />
+Wiki formatting rules</b></p>
<p>
</ul>
<h4> Tables with |</h4>
-| just enclose | things with the dash | character | <br>
-| to build a | table structure | <br>
-| browsers usually | leave out the missing | cells | <br>
+| just enclose | things with the dash | character | <br />
+| to build a | table structure | <br />
+| browsers usually | leave out the missing | cells | <br />
<p>
</ul>
<h4>Further readings</h4>
-There are more possibilities for Wiki mark-up. Please consult the <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target=_new>Erfurt Wiki Homepage</a> for more information.
+There are more possibilities for Wiki mark-up. Please consult the <a href="http://erfurtwiki.sourceforge.net" target="_new">Erfurt Wiki Homepage</a> for more information.
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Adding a Comment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Adding a Comment</b></p>
-<P>Comments can be added to an assessment to:
+<p>Comments can be added to an assessment to:
-<OL>
-<LI>Add additional explaination or clarification to the assessment (by
+<ol>
+<li>Add additional explaination or clarification to the assessment (by
the student who assessed the piece of work);
-<LI>Query the statements made in the assessment (by the student whose
+<li>Query the statements made in the assessment (by the student whose
piece of work is being assessed;
-<LI>Try to resolve difficulties which may have arisen during the discussion
+<li>Try to resolve difficulties which may have arisen during the discussion
on the assessment (by the teacher);
-</OL>
-<P>The aim of the comments is to try either reach agreement on the
+</ol>
+<p>The aim of the comments is to try either reach agreement on the
current assessment or persuade the assessor to revise their assessment.
This discussion should be undertaken in a reasonable way.
-<P>If the work is reassessed then the old comments are discarded and
+<p>If the work is reassessed then the old comments are discarded and
are no longer shown with the new assessment.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Agreement of Assessments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Agreement of Assessments</b></p>
-<P>A workshop assignment can have either of these characteristics:
+<p>A workshop assignment can have either of these characteristics:
-<OL>
-<LI>In the submission and assessment phase when the students see the
+<ol>
+<li>In the submission and assessment phase when the students see the
assessments made by other students there is no feedback
from the students who submitted the work to the students who made
the assessment. There may be feedback from the teacher if the teacher
to the student who made the assessment. There will be, however,
be only one way feedback between peers on any one piece of work.
-<LI>In the submission and assessment phase the students see the
+<li>In the submission and assessment phase the students see the
assessments made by other students and they are allowed to comment
on these assessments. They may agree or disagree with the (peer) assessment.
If they agree with the assessment then the assessment stands and is
which is still in "dispute" when the deadline is reached
is not used in the final grades. This gives two way feedback
between peers on each piece of work.
-</OL>
-<P>If the second method of working is chosen there is the option of switching off the display
+</ol>
+<p>If the second method of working is chosen there is the option of switching off the display
of grades. That is, if this "hide grades" option is exercised, only the comments
in the assessment are shown to the student who work is being assessed.
The grades are shown only after agreement has been reached (on the
comments alone). Note that this option only effective when agreement on
assessments is required.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Anonymous Grading</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Anonymous Grading</b></p>
-<P>A peer graded assignment can be graded anonymously. In this
+<p>A peer graded assignment can be graded anonymously. In this
case the names (and any photos) of the students doing the grading
are not shown. Only the (file) names of the submissions are used to identify
the peices of work being graded.
-<P>When the peer graded assignment is not graded anonymously, the
+<p>When the peer graded assignment is not graded anonymously, the
pieces of work are shown with the names (and any photos) of the
students who submitted the work. This may lead to bias in the gradings.
-<P>Note that if the teacher's grades are shown to the students these are
+<p>Note that if the teacher's grades are shown to the students these are
never shown anonymously.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Assessment of Teacher's Examples</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Assessment of Teacher's Examples</b></p>
-<P>After the teacher has submitted the examples it is important that the
+<p>After the teacher has submitted the examples it is important that the
teacher assess these examples.</p>
<p>These assessments are private to the teacher, they are NOT shown
the higher is their "Grading grade". The teacher has a degree of
control on how the agreement is translated into grades. This the
"Comparison of Assessments" option in the workshop. This option
- can be changed at any time and the comparisons re-calculated.</P>
+ can be changed at any time and the comparisons re-calculated.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Peer Graded Assignment Type</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Peer Graded Assignment Type</b></p>
-<P>A peer graded assignment can have one of two types:
+<p>A peer graded assignment can have one of two types:
-<OL>
-<LI>Only feedback on the assessment elements and the general comment
+<ol>
+<li>Only feedback on the assessment elements and the general comment
is entered. The grading of assessment elements is not seen in the
grading pages. Assignments themselves are not given an overall grade.
However, the grading performance of the students is measured and
this, and only this measure contributes towards the final grades given
to the students.
-<LI>Here the teacher and peers are asked to provide both feedback and
+<li>Here the teacher and peers are asked to provide both feedback and
grades. The assignments are given an overall quantative grade as well
as the qualative data. The final grade for a student will be calculated
from the (weighted) contributions of the teacher's grade, the mean
peers' grade and the student's grading performance.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Editing a Comment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Editing a Comment</b></p>
-<P>As with other items there is a short period of time allowed when
+<p>As with other items there is a short period of time allowed when
the text of comments can be amended. The comment is not shown
on the assessment until this period has elapsed.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Assignment Elements</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Assignment Elements</b></p>
-<P>For ease of grading, a Workshop Assignment should have a reasonable
+<p>For ease of grading, a Workshop Assignment should have a reasonable
number of "Assessment Elements". Each element should cover
a particular aspect of the assignment. Typically an assignment will have
something between 5 to 15 elements for comments and grading, the
assignment with only one element is allowed and has a similar assessment
strategy to the standard Moodle Assignment.
-<P>The type of elements dependent of the assignment's grading strategy.
+<p>The type of elements dependent of the assignment's grading strategy.
-<P><B>Not Graded.</B> The elements are descriptions of aspects of the assignment.
+<p><b>Not Graded.</b> The elements are descriptions of aspects of the assignment.
The assessor is asked to comment on each of these aspects. As with all the grading
strategies, there is also an area for general comments.
-<P><B>Accumulative Grading.</B> The elements have the following three features:
-<OL>
-<LI>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
+<p><b>Accumulative Grading.</b> The elements have the following three features:
+<ol>
+<li>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
aspect of the assignment is being assessed. If the assessment is qualatative
it is helpful to give details of what is considered excellent, average
and poor.
-<LI>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
+<li>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
scales. These range from simple Yes/No scales, through multipoint scales to
a full percentage scale. Each element has its own scale which should be choosen
to fit the number of possible variations for that element. Note that the scale
grade, a two point scale has the same "influence" as a 100 point
scale if the respective elements have the same weight...
-<LI>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
+<li>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
importance when calculating the overall grade of the assignment. This can be
changed by giving the more importance elements a weight greater than one, and
the less important elements a weight below one. Changing the weights does NOT
effect the maximum grade, that value is fixed by the Maximum Grade parameter
of the peer assignment. Weights can be assigned negative values, this is an
experimental feature.
-</OL>
-<P><B>Error Banded Grading.</B> The elements will normally describe certain items
+</ol>
+<p><b>Error Banded Grading.</b> The elements will normally describe certain items
or aspects which must be present in the assignment. The assessment is made on the
present or absence of these items or aspects. The teacher must all set of grade table which
give the suggested grades when all the items are present, when one is absent, when two are
overall "error count" is a weighted sum of the missing items. The assessor
can always make a minor adjustment to these suggested grades.
-<P><B>Criterion Grading.</B> The elements will give a set of "level" statements
+<p><b>Criterion Grading.</b> The elements will give a set of "level" statements
which can be used to rank the assignment. The statements may be cumulative or they may
each be self contained. The assessor must decide which statement best fits each piece of
work. The teacher must also relate each criterion statement with a suggested grade. These
should normally be in order. The assessor can make a minor adjustment to these
-suggested grades.</P>
+suggested grades.</p>
-<P><B>Rubric Grading.</B> This is similar to Criterion Grading but there is more than
+<p><b>Rubric Grading.</b> This is similar to Criterion Grading but there is more than
one criteria. The number of criteria is given in the assignment parameters. Within each
criterion there can be up to five "level" statements. In a given assignment
the number of levels can vary from criterion to criterion. When setting up a criterion a
two levels, others have three, up to five levels. The criteria can be weighted. The levels
are scored 0, 1, 2, up to 4. The grade for the assessment is a weighted sum of these
scores.
-</P>
\ No newline at end of file
+</p>
\ No newline at end of file
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>The Final Grades</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>The Final Grades</b></p>
-<P>The table on this screen lists the final grades and their breakdown as shown to
+<p>The table on this screen lists the final grades and their breakdown as shown to
the students. If there are missing values in the table then it is possible to "go back"
and add these. In fact, there are two adjustments which can be made to the Final Grades.
-<OL>
-<LI>If a teacher's grade needs to be added then the piece of work can be
+<ol>
+<li>If a teacher's grade needs to be added then the piece of work can be
graded by going
to the teacher's Management screen for assignment and clicking on the link "Student
Submissions for Assessment". Any otherstanding submissions can be graded. Once this has
been done then move the assignment back to Phase 3 and re-calculate the Final grades. In a
similar way any assessments which have not been graded can be graded from the Management
screen.
-<LI>If it is desired to use a different weighting scheme then the assignment should be moved
+<li>If it is desired to use a different weighting scheme then the assignment should be moved
back to Phase 3 and link "Calculate Final Grades" can be clicked and the new
weights entered. After the grades have been re-calcualted the assignment should be moved
to Phase 4 to make the new grades available.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading of Peer Assignments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading of Peer Assignments</b></p>
-<P>For ease of grading a Peer Assignment is divided into a number of
+<p>For ease of grading a Peer Assignment is divided into a number of
assessment "elements". Each element covers
a particular aspect of the assignment. Depending on the type of assessment,
for each element you should
-<OL>
-<LI>Enter a Grade by clicking in the appropriate button or selecting an appropriate
+<ol>
+<li>Enter a Grade by clicking in the appropriate button or selecting an appropriate
number from the drop down menu.
-<LI>Enter an explaination of why you gave that grade in the Feedback box. If
+<li>Enter an explaination of why you gave that grade in the Feedback box. If
you feel that the reason is obvious then leave the box empty. Note, however,
that the teacher may look at your assessment and may well query a grade
if there is no explaination.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-<P>In other type of asessments, you are asked to determine if various items
+<p>In other type of asessments, you are asked to determine if various items
are present or absent, in others you are asked to choose which statement best
fits the peice of work. In both of these assignments you can adjust the grade
somewhat as you see fit.
-<P>The last box on this form allows you to make a general comment on the
+<p>The last box on this form allows you to make a general comment on the
work. This should justify your assessment. It should be polite and as far as
possible constructive. Your assessment will be shown to the student who
produced the piece of work.
-<P>You have a limited period of time, typically half an hour, in which to
+<p>You have a limited period of time, typically half an hour, in which to
change your mind and alter your grades or comments. Once that period
is over the person whose work you are assessing is notified about the assessment.
At that stage you can view your assessment but you cannot change it.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading the Student Assessments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading the Student Assessments</b></p>
-<P>This screen is used to enter the teacher's grade for the assessment made
+<p>This screen is used to enter the teacher's grade for the assessment made
by the student during the submission and assessment phase of the assignment. A relatively
simple grading is used, the score out of 20. The treacher can decide what is
being graded and the relative scores from the instructions given to the students
before the assignment started. For example, at a higher level the students may be
required to give critical comments, at an intermediate level the students may be
required to point out strengths and weaknesses, and at a lower level the students
- may be simply pointing out errors and inaccuracies.</P>
+ may be simply pointing out errors and inaccuracies.</p>
-<P>If available the Teacher's own assessment is shown before that of the
+<p>If available the Teacher's own assessment is shown before that of the
student so an easy comparison can be made. The teacher's own
- comments can act as a kind of benchmark.</P>
+ comments can act as a kind of benchmark.</p>
-<P>The grade for the assessment is
+<p>The grade for the assessment is
saved by clicking on the apprpriate button at the foot of the page. There is a
chance to repeat the grading within the "editing" period. Once that
time has elapsed the teacher's comment is made available to the student. The
final grades are made available. (The reason for this is the likely confusion
between the grade for the peice of work and the grade for the ASSESSMENT
of that work, at an early stage of an assignment the distinction will not be
- clear to students.)</P>
+ clear to students.)</p>
-<p align=center><b>Grade of Student Assessments</b></p>
+<p align="center"><b>Grade of Student Assessments</b></p>
<p>This is the maximum grade given to the assessments make by students of their
own and/or other work. That is, the grade for their assessments. The actual
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading Strategy</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading Strategy</b></p>
-<P>A workshop assignment is quite flexible in the type of grading scheme used. This can be:
+<p>A workshop assignment is quite flexible in the type of grading scheme used. This can be:
-<OL>
-<LI><B>No grading:</B> In this type of assignment the teacher is not
+<ol>
+<li><b>No grading:</b> In this type of assignment the teacher is not
interested in quantative assessment from the students at all. The students
make comments of the pieces of works but not grade them. The teacher,
however, can, if desired, grade the student comments. These
If the teacher does not grade the student assessments then the assignment
does not have any final grades.
-<LI><B>Accumulative grading:</B> This is the default type of grading.
+<li><b>Accumulative grading:</b> This is the default type of grading.
In this type of assignment the grade of each
assessment is made up of a number of "assessment elements".
Each element should cover
assignment with only one element is allowed and has a similar assessment
strategy to the standard Moodle Assignment.
-<P>Elements have the following three features:
-<OL>
-<LI>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
+<p>Elements have the following three features:
+<ol>
+<li>The DESCRIPTION of the assessment element. This should clearly state what
aspect of the assignment is being assessed. If the assessment is qualatative
it is helpful to give details of what is considered excellent, average
and poor.
-<LI>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
+<li>The SCALE of the assessment element. There are a number of prefined
scales. These range from simple Yes/No scales, through multipoint scales to
a full percentage scale. Each element has its own scale which should be choosen
to fit the number of possible variations for that element. Note that the scale
grade, a two point scale has the same "influence" as a 100 point
scale if the respective elements have the same weight...
-<LI>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
+<li>The WEIGHT of the assessment element. By default the elements are given the same
importance when calculating the overall grade of the assignment. This can be
changed by giving the more importance elements a weight greater than one, and
the less important elements a weight below one. Changing the weights does NOT
effect the maximum grade, that value is fixed by the Maximum Grade parameter
of the peer assignment. Weights can be assigned negative values, this is an
experimental feature.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-<LI><B>Error Banded Grading:</B> In this type of assignment the submissions are
+<li><b>Error Banded Grading:</b> In this type of assignment the submissions are
graded on a set of Yes/No scales. The grade is determined by the "Grade
Table " which gives the relationship between the number of
"errors" and the suggested grade. For example an assignment may have six
an assignment with 10 items.The assessor can adjust the suggested grade by up
to 20% either way to give the submission's final grade.
-<LI><B>Criteria Grading:</B> This is simpliest type of assessment to grade (although
+<li><b>Criteria Grading:</b> This is simpliest type of assessment to grade (although
not necessarily the most straightforward to set up). The submissions are
graded against a set of criteria statments. The assessor choses which statement
best fits the piece of work. The grade is determined by a "Criteria
up to five statements. The sets are given individual
weights and the grade is a weighted combination of the scores from each set. There
is <b>no</b> adjustment option in this assessment type.
-</OL>
+</ol>
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Grading of Student Submissions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Grading of Student Submissions</b></p>
-<P>In general, it is recommended that the teacher assesses a fair proportion of
+<p>In general, it is recommended that the teacher assesses a fair proportion of
the work submitted by the students. The assessments are shown to the
- students and will provide important feedback on their work.</P>
+ students and will provide important feedback on their work.</p>
-<P>The assessments from the teacher are used in two ways in the workshop
+<p>The assessments from the teacher are used in two ways in the workshop
module. Firstly, they are used in the calculations to determine
the "grading grades", the grades given the student assessments.
Secondly they are used in the calculation of the submission grades. These
and the submission grade calculations. If it felt that the student
assessments are too high (or too low), increasing this weighting factor
should be considered as that will help stablise the grades to a degree.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Including Self in the Assignment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Including Self in the Assignment</b></p>
-<P>A peer graded assignment can optionally include the student's own work
+<p>A peer graded assignment can optionally include the student's own work
in the set of pieces each student is asked to grade. This will mean that if, say, the
number of peer assessors is 5, then each student will be asked to grade 6
pieces of work, one of them being their own work.
-<P>If the number of peer assessors is set to zero and the include self option
+<p>If the number of peer assessors is set to zero and the include self option
is turned on then the assignment becomes a self-graded assignment. This
may or may not include the teacher's grading depending on whether that
option is set or not.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>The League Table of Submissions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>The League Table of Submissions</b></p>
<p>The League Table lists the best submissions produced in the assignment. The number
of entries can set to zero, a number between 1 and 20, 50 or 100. If set to
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Managing a Workshop Assignment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Managing a Workshop Assignment</b></p>
<p>A Workshop Assignment is more complex than an ordinary assignment.
It involves a number of steps or phases. These are</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Managing a Workshop Assignment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Managing a Workshop Assignment</b></p>
<p>A Workshop Assignment is more complex than an ordinary assignment.
It involves a number of steps or phases. These are</p>
-<P><IMG VALIGN=absmiddle SRC="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/workshop/icon.gif"> <B>Workshop</B></P>
-<UL>
-<P>A Workshop is a peer assessment activity with a huge array of options.
+<p><img valign="absmiddle" src="<?php echo $CFG->wwwroot?>/mod/workshop/icon.gif"> <b>Workshop</b></p>
+<ul>
+<p>A Workshop is a peer assessment activity with a huge array of options.
It allows participants to assess each other's projects, as well as
exemplar projects, in a number of ways. It also coordinates the
collection and distribution of these assessments in a variety of ways.
The Workshop module is contributed by Ray Kingdon.
-</P>
-</UL>
+</p>
+</ul>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Number of Assessments of Student submissions</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Number of Assessments of Student submissions</b></p>
-<P>This number determines whether the students are asked to peer assess other
+<p>This number determines whether the students are asked to peer assess other
students' work. If it is not zero then each student is offered that number
of pieces of work from other students. After assessment the originator of
the work can view the comments and possibly the grade given by their peer.
(The peer assessment process may be iterative depending on the setting of
"Agree Assessments" option.)
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Number of Assessments of Teacher's Examples</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Number of Assessments of Teacher's Examples</b></p>
-<P>This number determines whether the students are asked to assess
+<p>This number determines whether the students are asked to assess
any example pieces of work before submitting their own work. If it is
non-zero then each student must assess that number of example pieces
of work. They cannot submit their own work until these assessments
have been made.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Number of Comments, Elements, Bands, Criteria or Rubrics</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Number of Comments, Elements, Bands, Criteria or Rubrics</b></p>
-<P>The number entered here determines how many items will be used in
+<p>The number entered here determines how many items will be used in
the assessments. Depending on the type of grading strategy, this number
gives the number of comments, assessments elements, bands, criteria or
categories (sets) of criteria in a rubric. Typically an assignment will have
something between 5 to 15 assessment items, the
actual number depending on the size and complexity of the assignment.
-<P>All assessments have a General Comments field. For a "No
+<p>All assessments have a General Comments field. For a "No
Grading" assignment the value given here determines the
number of additional comment areas. It can be specified as zero and results
in the assessment having only a single General Comments area.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>The Over Allocation Level</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>The Over Allocation Level</b></p>
<p>This level determines whether the allocation of peer assessments to the class
is balanced or not. Here the term "balanced" applies to the number
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Resubmitting assignments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Resubmitting assignments</b></p>
-<P>By default, students cannot resubmit assignments, they are allowed only one submission.</P>
+<p>By default, students cannot resubmit assignments, they are allowed only one submission.</p>
-<P>If you turn this option on, then students will be allowed to submit more than one piece of work
+<p>If you turn this option on, then students will be allowed to submit more than one piece of work
to this assignment. This may be useful if the teacher wants to encourage students to do better
- work by an iterative process.</P>
+ work by an iterative process.</p>
-<P>The assessment of submissions is allocated on the basis of the number of assessments a piece
+<p>The assessment of submissions is allocated on the basis of the number of assessments a piece
of work has had. Thus new submissions from a student are likely to be candidates for peer
assessment. However, if a student resubmits a number of pieces of work in quick succession then
they are all equally likely to be assessed. The assignment does NOT give priority to the newest
submission.
-<P>The student's final grade is based on their overall "grading grade"
+<p>The student's final grade is based on their overall "grading grade"
and the submission with the highest grade.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Self Assessment</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Self Assessment</b></p>
-<P>A workshop assignment can optionally include the student's own work
+<p>A workshop assignment can optionally include the student's own work
in the set of pieces each student is asked to assess. This will mean that if, say, the
number of student pieces of work each student has to assess is set at 5, then
each student will be asked to assess 6 pieces of work, one of them being their own work.
-<P>If the number of student pieces of work is set to zero and the self assessment option
+<p>If the number of student pieces of work is set to zero and the self assessment option
is turned on then the assignment becomes a self-graded assignment.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Hiding the Display of Grades</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Hiding the Display of Grades</b></p>
-<P>This option can be used in a workshop assignment where there
+<p>This option can be used in a workshop assignment where there
must be agreement between the students on each assessment.
The default value is to show the student whose work is being
assessed both the comments and the grades in the peer assessments. This
may lead to more disputes than when the option is turned on and the
assessments are shown without the grades.
-<P>If the option is taken to hide grades in the peer assessments the
+<p>If the option is taken to hide grades in the peer assessments the
grades are revealed once agreement has been reached. This agreement
will, of course, have been made only on the comments. If these comments
do not reasonably match the grades then the student whose work is being
assessed may well appeal to the teacher.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Submission of Teacher's Examples</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Submission of Teacher's Examples</b></p>
-<P>If the students are required to assess some example pieces of work
+<p>If the students are required to assess some example pieces of work
before submitting their own work, the teacher uses this link to submit
that work. The teacher can submit any number of pieces of work. If the
number of pieces of work is greater than the number of example
the examples is allocated to the students the same number of times.
The allocation is random in that if, say, ten examples are submitted then
it is highly unlikely that the first student is allocated submissions
- 1, 2 and 3 to assess.</P>
+ 1, 2 and 3 to assess.</p>
-<P>If the teacher submits a fewer number of examples than given
+<p>If the teacher submits a fewer number of examples than given
in the corresponding parameter of the assignment, the students
- are given just those examples to assess.</P>
+ are given just those examples to assess.</p>
-<P>After the teacher has submitted the examples it is important for the
+<p>After the teacher has submitted the examples it is important for the
teacher to assess these examples. The assessments by the teacher are used
internally when the students assess these examples. The closer the teacher
and the student are the higher the "grading grade" awarded to the
<p>The examples and their assessments can be viewed and revised from the
Administration page of the workshop.
-</P>
+</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Weight of Teacher's Assessments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>Weight of Teacher's Assessments</b></p>
-<P>This option, usually set at 1, can be used to either "switch off"
+<p>This option, usually set at 1, can be used to either "switch off"
any assessments made by the teacher, to give them an equal weight as the
student assessments, or give them more weight than the student assessemnts.</p>
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>UnGraded Assessments</B></P>
+<p align="center"><b>UnGraded Assessments</b></p>
-<P>In general, the assessments made by students are given a (small) proportion
+<p>In general, the assessments made by students are given a (small) proportion
of marks which count towards their final grade. The grading of these
assessments (and those made by the teacher) is done in the background by
the workshop module. Provided a submission is assessed
-<P ALIGN=CENTER><B>Writing</B></P>\r
-\r
-<P>When writing text for others to read, try and write directly to your audience.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>Explain your ideas as clearly and simply as you can to help avoid misunderstandings.\r
- One thing you can do is to avoid long words when a short one will do.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>In the forums it will really help to keep your whole posts short and on-topic. \r
- Instead of one long rambling post that makes many different points, it may be\r
- better to write several shorter ones (they may even belong in separate forums).\r
-\r
-<P>Re-edit your text as much as necessary until you get it right. \r
- Even in forum posts you have <?PHP echo ($CFG->maxeditingtime/60) ?> minutes \r
- after you've posted it to go back and improve it if necessary.</P>\r
-\r
-<P>When replying to others, try and think of interesting questions you \r
- can ask them. This will help both you and the other person think (and learn!)\r
- about the subject you are discussing.</P>\r
-\r
-\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=questions.html">More info about asking questions</a></p>\r
-<p align=right><a href="help.php?file=reading.html">More info about reading</a></p>\r
+<p align="center"><b>Writing</b></p>
+
+
+
+<p>When writing text for others to read, try and write directly to your audience.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>Explain your ideas as clearly and simply as you can to help avoid misunderstandings.
+
+ One thing you can do is to avoid long words when a short one will do.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>In the forums it will really help to keep your whole posts short and on-topic.
+
+ Instead of one long rambling post that makes many different points, it may be
+
+ better to write several shorter ones (they may even belong in separate forums).
+
+
+
+<p>Re-edit your text as much as necessary until you get it right.
+
+ Even in forum posts you have <?php echo ($CFG->maxeditingtime/60) ?> minutes
+
+ after you've posted it to go back and improve it if necessary.</p>
+
+
+
+<p>When replying to others, try and think of interesting questions you
+
+ can ask them. This will help both you and the other person think (and learn!)
+
+ about the subject you are discussing.</p>
+
+
+
+
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=questions.html">More info about asking questions</a></p>
+
+<p align="right"><a href="help.php?file=reading.html">More info about reading</a></p>
+
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// quiz.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
//translators: You might want to leave the first two items 'as is' in English
$string['modulename'] = 'Hot Potatoes Quiz';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// journal.php - created with Moodle 1.2 + (2004032100)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// label.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// lesson.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// moodle.php - created with Moodle 1.5 development (2004082300)
$string['backupnameformat'] = '%%Y%%m%%d-%%H%%M';
$string['backupnoneusersinfo'] = 'Notice: You have selected to backup \"none\" users, so all the modules backup have been switched to \"without user data\" mode. Please note that the \"exercise\" and \"workshop\" modules aren\'t compatible with this type of backup, so they have been deactivated completely.';
$string['backuporiginalname'] = 'Backup Name';
-$string['backupsavetohelp'] = 'Full path to the directory where you want to save the backup files<br>(leave blank to save in its course default dir)';
+$string['backupsavetohelp'] = 'Full path to the directory where you want to save the backup files<br />(leave blank to save in its course default dir)';
$string['backupuserfileshelp'] = 'Choose whether user files (eg profile images) should be included in automated backups';
$string['backupusershelp'] = 'Select whether you want to include all the users in the server or only the needed users for each course';
$string['backupversion'] = 'Backup Version';
$string['confignotifyloginfailures'] = 'If login failures have been recorded, email notifications can be sent out. Who should see these notifications?';
$string['confignotifyloginthreshold'] = 'If notifications about failed logins are active, how many failed login attempts by one user or one IP address is it worth notifying about?';
$string['configopentogoogle'] = 'If you enable this setting, then Google will be allowed to enter your site as a Guest. In addition, people coming in to your site via a Google search will automatically be logged in as a Guest. Note that this only provides transparent access to courses that already allow guest access.';
-$string['configproxyhost'] = 'If this <B>server</B> needs to use a proxy computer (eg a firewall) to access the Internet, then provide the proxy hostname and port here. Otherwise leave it blank.';
+$string['configproxyhost'] = 'If this <b>server</b> needs to use a proxy computer (eg a firewall) to access the Internet, then provide the proxy hostname and port here. Otherwise leave it blank.';
$string['configsecureforms'] = 'Moodle can use an additional level of security when accepting data from web forms. If this is enabled, then the browser\'s HTTP_REFERER variable is checked against the current form address. In a very few cases this can cause problems if the user is using a firewall (eg Zonealarm) configured to strip HTTP_REFERER from their web traffic. Symptoms are getting \'stuck\' on a form. If your users are having problems with the login page (for example) you might want to disable this setting, although it might leave your site more open to brute-force password attacks. If in doubt, leave this set to \'Yes\'.';
$string['configsessioncookie'] = 'This setting customises the name of the cookie used for Moodle sessions. This is optional, and only useful to avoid cookies being confused when there is more than one copy of Moodle running within the same web site.';
$string['configsessiontimeout'] = 'If people logged in to this site are idle for a long time (without loading pages) then they are automatically logged out (their session is ended). This variable specifies how long this time should be.';
If you need help, please contact the site administrator,
$a->admin';
$string['emailconfirmationsubject'] = '$a: account confirmation';
-$string['emailconfirmsent'] = ' <P>An email should have been sent to your address at <B>$a</B>
- <P>It contains easy instructions to complete your registration.
- <P>If you continue to have difficulty, contact the site administrator.';
+$string['emailconfirmsent'] = ' <p>An email should have been sent to your address at <b>$a</b>
+ <p>It contains easy instructions to complete your registration.
+ <p>If you continue to have difficulty, contact the site administrator.';
$string['emaildigest'] = 'Email digest type';
$string['emaildigestcomplete'] = 'Complete (daily email with full posts)';
$string['emaildigestoff'] = 'No digest (single email per forum post)';
$string['enrollfirst'] = 'You have to enroll in one of the courses before you can use the site activities';
$string['enrolmentconfirmation'] = 'You are about to enroll yourself as a member of this course.<br />Are you sure you wish to do this?';
$string['enrolmentkey'] = 'Enrolment key';
-$string['enrolmentkeyfrom'] = 'This course requires an \'enrolment key\' - a one-time<BR>
+$string['enrolmentkeyfrom'] = 'This course requires an \'enrolment key\' - a one-time<br />
password that you should have received from $a';
-$string['enrolmentkeyhint'] = 'That enrolment key was incorrect, please try again<BR>
+$string['enrolmentkeyhint'] = 'That enrolment key was incorrect, please try again<br />
(Here\'s a hint - it starts with \'$a\')';
$string['enrolmentnew'] = 'New enrolment in $a';
$string['enrolmentnewuser'] = '$a->user has enrolled in course \"$a->course\"';
$string['passwordrecovery'] = 'Yes, help me log in';
$string['passwordsdiffer'] = 'These passwords do not match';
$string['passwordsent'] = 'Password has been sent';
-$string['passwordsenttext'] = ' <P>An email has been sent to your address at $a->email.
- <P><B>Please check your email for your new password</B>
- <P>The new password was automatically generated, so you might like to
- <A HREF=$a->link>change it to something easier to remember</A>.';
+$string['passwordsenttext'] = ' <p>An email has been sent to your address at $a->email.
+ <p><b>Please check your email for your new password</b>
+ <p>The new password was automatically generated, so you might like to
+ <a href=$a->link>change it to something easier to remember</a>.';
$string['pathnotexists'] = 'Path doesn\'t exist in your server!';
$string['pathslasherror'] = 'Path can\'t end with a slash!!';
$string['paymentinstant'] = 'Use the button below to pay and be enrolled within minutes!';
$string['search'] = 'Search';
$string['searchagain'] = 'Search again';
$string['searchcourses'] = 'Search courses';
-$string['searchhelp'] = 'You can search for multiple words at once.<p>word : find any match of this word within the text.<br>+word : only exact matching words will be found.<br>-word : don\'t include results containing this word.';
+$string['searchhelp'] = 'You can search for multiple words at once.<p>word : find any match of this word within the text.<br />+word : only exact matching words will be found.<br />-word : don\'t include results containing this word.';
$string['searchresults'] = 'Search results';
$string['sec'] = 'sec';
$string['secs'] = 'secs';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// pix.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['questionnaireid'] = "Survey";
$string['notavail'] = "That questionnaire is not available yet. Try again later.";
$string['mustcomplete'] = "<b>You must complete this questionnaire <i>now</i> to record your results. "
- ."You will not be allowed to complete it at another time</b><br><br>\n";
+ ."You will not be allowed to complete it at another time</b><br /><br />\n";
$string['alreadyfilled'] = "You have already filled out this questionnaire for us. Thank you.";
?>
\ No newline at end of file
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// quiz.php - created with Moodle 1.4 development (2004080300)
$string['filloutthreequestions'] = 'You must fill out at least three questions. Questions left blank will not be used.';
$string['fillouttwochoices'] = 'You must fill out at least two choices. Choices left blank will not be used.';
$string['forceregeneration'] = 'force regeneration';
-$string['fractionsaddwrong'] = 'The positive grades you have chosen do not add up to 100%%<BR>Instead, they add up to $a%%<BR>Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
-$string['fractionsnomax'] = 'One of the answers should be 100%%, so that it is<BR>possible to get a full grade for this question.<BR>Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
+$string['fractionsaddwrong'] = 'The positive grades you have chosen do not add up to 100%%<br />Instead, they add up to $a%%<br />Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
+$string['fractionsnomax'] = 'One of the answers should be 100%%, so that it is<br />possible to get a full grade for this question.<br />Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
$string['functiontakesatleasttwo'] = 'The function $a must have at least two arguments';
$string['functiontakesnoargs'] = 'The function $a does not take any arguments';
$string['functiontakesonearg'] = 'The function $a must have exactly one argument';
$string['noreviewuntil'] = 'You are not allowed to review this quiz until $a';
$string['noscript'] = 'JavaScript must be enabled to continue!';
$string['notenoughanswers'] = 'This type of question requires at least $a answers';
-$string['notenoughsubquestions'] = 'Not enough sub-questions have been defined!<br>Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
+$string['notenoughsubquestions'] = 'Not enough sub-questions have been defined!<br />Do you want to go back and fix this question?';
$string['numerical'] = 'Numerical';
$string['optional'] = 'optional';
$string['overdue'] = 'Overdue';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// resource.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003120700)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
#------------------------------------------------------------
$string['modulename'] = 'Scorm';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// survey.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
$string['attls8short'] = 'know why people do';
$string['attls9'] = 'I often find myself arguing with the authors of books that I read, trying to logically figure out why they\'re wrong.';
$string['attls9short'] = 'argue with authors';
-$string['attlsintro'] = 'The purpose of this questionnaire is to help us evaluate your attitudes towards thinking and learning.\r
-\r
+$string['attlsintro'] = 'The purpose of this questionnaire is to help us evaluate your attitudes towards thinking and learning.
+
+
+
There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.';
$string['attlsm1'] = 'Attitudes Towards Thinking and Learning';
$string['attlsm2'] = 'Connected Learning';
$string['colles8short'] = 'I\'m critical of readings';
$string['colles9'] = 'I explain my ideas to other students.';
$string['colles9short'] = 'I explain my ideas';
-$string['collesaintro'] = 'The purpose of this survey is to help us understand how well the online delivery of this unit enabled you to learn.\r
-\r
-Each one of the 24 statements below asks about your experience in this unit.\r
-\r
-There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.\r
-\r
-Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.\r
-\r
+$string['collesaintro'] = 'The purpose of this survey is to help us understand how well the online delivery of this unit enabled you to learn.
+
+
+
+Each one of the 24 statements below asks about your experience in this unit.
+
+
+
+There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.
+
+
+
+Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.
+
+
+
Thanks very much.';
$string['collesaname'] = 'COLLES (Actual)';
-$string['collesapintro'] = 'The purpose of this questionnaire is to help us understand how well the online delivery of this unit enabled you to learn. \r
-\r
-Each one of the 24 statements below asks you to compare your <B>preferred</B> (ideal) and <B>actual</B> experience in this unit.\r
-\r
-There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.\r
-\r
-Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.\r
-\r
+$string['collesapintro'] = 'The purpose of this questionnaire is to help us understand how well the online delivery of this unit enabled you to learn.
+
+
+
+Each one of the 24 statements below asks you to compare your <b>preferred</b> (ideal) and <b>actual</b> experience in this unit.
+
+
+
+There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.
+
+
+
+Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.
+
+
+
Thanks very much.';
$string['collesapname'] = 'COLLES (Preferred and Actual)';
$string['collesm1'] = 'Relevance';
$string['collesm6'] = 'Interpretation';
$string['collesm6short'] = 'Interpretation';
$string['collesmintro'] = 'In this online unit...';
-$string['collespintro'] = 'The purpose of this survey is to help us understand what you value in an online learning experience.\r
-\r
-Each one of the 24 statements below asks about your <B>preferred</B> (ideal) experience in this unit.\r
-\r
-There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.\r
-\r
-Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.\r
-\r
+$string['collespintro'] = 'The purpose of this survey is to help us understand what you value in an online learning experience.
+
+
+
+Each one of the 24 statements below asks about your <b>preferred</b> (ideal) experience in this unit.
+
+
+
+There are no \'right\' or \'wrong\' answers; we are interested only in your opinion. Please be assured that your responses will be treated with a high degree of confidentiality, and will not affect your assessment.
+
+
+
+Your carefully considered responses will help us improve the way this unit is presented online in the future.
+
+
+
Thanks very much.';
$string['collespname'] = 'COLLES (Preferred)';
$string['done'] = 'Done';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// webquest.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2003111400)
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// wiki.php - created with Moodle 1.4 alpha (2004081900)
$string['preview'] = 'Preview';
$string['readonly'] = 'Read only page';
$string['refs'] = 'References';
-$string['removenotice'] = 'Note that only unreferenced pages will be listed here. And because the ewiki engine itself does only limited testing if a page is referenced it may miss some of them here.<br>If you however empty a page first, it will get listed here too. Various other database diagnostics are made as well.';
+$string['removenotice'] = 'Note that only unreferenced pages will be listed here. And because the ewiki engine itself does only limited testing if a page is referenced it may miss some of them here.<br />If you however empty a page first, it will get listed here too. Various other database diagnostics are made as well.';
$string['removepagecheck'] = 'Are you sure that you want to delete these pages ?';
$string['removepages'] = 'Remove pages';
$string['removeselectedpages'] = 'Remove selected pages';
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// workshop.php - created with Moodle 1.2 development (2004013101)
$string['nosubmissionsavailableforassessment'] = 'No Submissions available for assessment';
$string['notavailable'] = 'Not Available';
$string['notenoughexamplessubmitted'] = 'Not enough Examples submitted.';
-$string['noteonassessmentelements'] = 'Note that grading is broken down into a number of \'Assessment Elements\'.<BR>
- This makes the grading easier and more consistent. As teacher you must add these <BR>
- Elements before making the assignment available to students. This is done by<BR>
- clicking on the assignment in the course, if no elements are present you will be asked<BR>
- to add them. You can change the number of elements using the Edit Assignment screen,<BR>
+$string['noteonassessmentelements'] = 'Note that grading is broken down into a number of \'Assessment Elements\'.<br />
+ This makes the grading easier and more consistent. As teacher you must add these <br />
+ Elements before making the assignment available to students. This is done by<br />
+ clicking on the assignment in the course, if no elements are present you will be asked<br />
+ to add them. You can change the number of elements using the Edit Assignment screen,<br />
the elements themselves can be amended from the "Managing Assessment" screen. ';
$string['noteonstudentassessments'] = '{Grade from Student / Grading Grade for Assessment}';
$string['notgraded'] = 'Not Graded';
$string['view'] = 'View';
$string['viewassessmentofteacher'] = 'View Assessment of $a';
$string['viewotherassessments'] = 'View other Assessments';
-$string['warningonamendingelements'] = 'WARNING: There are submitted assessments. <BR>Do NOT change the number
+$string['warningonamendingelements'] = 'WARNING: There are submitted assessments. <br />Do NOT change the number
of elements, the scale types or the element weights.';
$string['weight'] = 'Weight';
$string['weightederrorcount'] = 'Weighted Error Count: $a';
-<?PHP //$Id$
+<?php //$Id$
//This library includes all the necessary stuff to use blocks in course pages
$db->debug = false;
if ($block->id = insert_record('blocks', $block)) {
notify(get_string('blocksuccess', '', $blocktitle), 'green');
- echo "<HR>";
+ echo "<hr>";
} else {
error("$block->name block could not be added to the block list!");
}
$blockinfo = blocks_get_default_blocks ($course->id,
blocks_get_config_default($course->format));
if ($CFG->debug) {
- echo 'Updating blockinfo for course: '.$course->shortname.'('.$blockinfo.')<br>';
+ echo 'Updating blockinfo for course: '.$course->shortname.'('.$blockinfo.')<br />';
}
}
}
<head>
<title>Moodle Environment Test</title>
</head>
-<body bgcolor=white>
+<body bgcolor="white">
<?php
echo "<th align=\"right\">$name</th>";
echo "<td align=\"left\">$value</td>";
if ($badcomment) {
- echo "<td align=\"left\"><font color=red>$badcomment</font></td>";
+ echo "<td align=\"left\"><font color=\"red\">$badcomment</font></td>";
} else {
- echo "<td align=\"left\"><font color=green>Looks good</font></td>";
+ echo "<td align=\"left\"><font color=\"green\">Looks good</font></td>";
}
echo "</tr>";
}
echo "<h2 align=\"center\">Moodle compatibility tester</h2>";
- echo "<table align=\"center\" border=1>";
+ echo "<table align=\"center\" border=\"1\">";
/// Check that PHP is of a sufficient version
echo "</table>";
if ($error == 1) {
- echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=
red>$error error was found. See <a href=\"http://moodle.org/doc\">http://moodle.org/doc</a></font></h2>";
+ echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=
\"red\">$error error was found. See <a href=\"http://moodle.org/doc\">http://moodle.org/doc</a></font></h2>";
} else if ($error) {
- echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=
red>$error errors were found. See <a href=\"http://moodle.org/doc\">http://moodle.org/doc</a></font></h2>";
+ echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=
\"red\">$error errors were found. See <a href=\"http://moodle.org/doc\">http://moodle.org/doc</a></font></h2>";
} else {
- echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=green>Server looks good - clear to install!</font></a></h2>";
+ echo "<h2 align=\"center\"><font color=\"green\">Server looks good - clear to install!</font></a></h2>";
}
?>
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
/// GLOBAL CONSTANTS /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
if ($SITE = get_site()) {
if ($result) {
if ($feedback) {
- echo "<P><FONT COLOR=green><B>".get_string("success")."</B></FONT></P>";
+ echo "<p><font color=\"green\"><b>".get_string("success")."</b></font></p>";
}
return true;
} else {
if ($feedback) {
- echo "<P><FONT COLOR=red><B>".get_string("error")."</B></FONT></P>";
+ echo "<p><font color=\"red\"><b>".get_string("error")."</b></font></p>";
}
return false;
}
if (!empty($sqlfile)) {
if (!is_readable($sqlfile)) {
$success = false;
- echo "<P>Tried to modify database, but \"$sqlfile\" doesn't exist!</P>";
+ echo "<p>Tried to modify database, but \"$sqlfile\" doesn't exist!</p>";
return $success;
} else {
$lines = file($sqlfile);
VALUES ('$timenow', '$userid', '$courseid', '$REMOTE_ADDR', '$module', '$cm', '$action', '$url', '$info')");
if (!$result and ($CFG->debug > 7)) {
- echo "<P>Error: Could not insert a new entry to the Moodle log</P>"; // Don't throw an error
+ echo "<p>Error: Could not insert a new entry to the Moodle log</p>"; // Don't throw an error
}
if (!$user and isset($USER->id)) {
if ($courseid == SITEID) {
*/
function print_object($object) {
- echo "<PRE>";
+ echo "<pre>";
print_r($object);
- echo "</PRE>";
+ echo "</pre>";
}
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// This file is generally only included from admin/index.php
// It defines default values for any important configuration variables
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
// Collection of routines in Moodle related to processing
// images using GD.
$fromX = 0;
$fromY = 'none';
- //print "set $set<BR>";
+ //print "set $set<br />";
//expand_pre($this->calculated['y_plot']);
foreach ($this->x_data as $index => $x) {
- //print "index $index<BR>";
+ //print "index $index<br />";
$thisY = $this->calculated['y_plot'][$set][$index];
$thisX = $this->calculated['x_plot'][$index];
- //print "$thisX, $thisY <BR>";
+ //print "$thisX, $thisY <br />";
if (($bar!='none') && (string)$thisY != 'none') {
if ($relatedset = $this->offset_relation[$set]) { // Moodle
round(($this->y_data[$set][$index] - $this->calculated['y_axis_right']['min'])
* $this->calculated['y_axis_right']['factor']);
} else {
- //print "$set $index<BR>";
+ //print "$set $index<br />";
$this->calculated['y_plot'][$set][$index] =
round(($this->y_data[$set][$index] - $this->calculated['y_axis_left']['min'])
* $this->calculated['y_axis_left']['factor']);
}
}
}
- //print "factor ".$this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']."<BR>";
+ //print "factor ".$this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']."<br />";
//expand_pre($this->calculated['x_plot']);
// calculate bar parameters if bars are to be drawn.
$tickX = $gridLeft; // tick x coord
foreach ($this->calculated['x_axis']['text'] as $set => $value) {
- //print "index: $set<BR>";
+ //print "index: $set<br />";
// x tick value
$this->calculated['x_axis']['tick_x'][$set] = $tickX;
// if num ticks is auto then x plot value is same as x tick
if ($this->parameter['x_axis_gridlines'] == 'auto') $this->calculated['x_plot'][$set] = round($tickX);
- //print $this->calculated['x_plot'][$set].'<BR>';
+ //print $this->calculated['x_plot'][$set].'<br />';
$tickX += $xStep;
}
- //print "xStep: $xStep <BR>";
+ //print "xStep: $xStep <br />";
// if numeric x axis then calculate x coords for each data point. this is seperate from x ticks.
$gridX = $gridLeft;
if (empty($this->calculated['x_axis']['factor'])) {
if ($this->parameter['x_axis_gridlines'] != 'auto') {
foreach ($this->x_data as $index => $x) {
- //print "index: $index, x: $x<BR>";
+ //print "index: $index, x: $x<br />";
$offset = $x - $this->calculated['x_axis']['min'];
//$gridX = ($offset * $this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']);
- //print "offset: $offset <BR>";
+ //print "offset: $offset <br />";
//$this->calculated['x_plot'][$set] = $gridLeft + ($offset * $this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']);
$this->calculated['x_plot'][$index] = $gridLeft + ($x - $min) * $factor;
- //print $this->calculated['x_plot'][$set].'<BR>';
+ //print $this->calculated['x_plot'][$set].'<br />';
}
}
//expand_pre($this->calculated['boundary_box']);
- //print "factor ".$this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']."<BR>";
+ //print "factor ".$this->calculated['x_axis']['factor']."<br />";
//expand_pre($this->calculated['x_plot']);
}
$max = $factor * @ceil($max / $factor);
$min = $factor * @floor($min / $factor);
- //print "max=$max, min=$min<BR>";
+ //print "max=$max, min=$min<br />";
return array('min' => $min, 'max' => $max);
}
//now that the page is valid (I hope) for strip_tags, strip all unwanted tags
- $goodStr = strip_tags( $goodStr, '<title><hr
><h1><h2><h3><h4><h5><h6><div><p><pre><sup><ul><ol><br><dl><dt><table><caption><tr><li><dd><th><td><a><area><img><form><input><textarea><button><select><option>' );
+ $goodStr = strip_tags( $goodStr, '<title><hr
/><h1><h2><h3><h4><h5><h6><div><p><pre><sup><ul><ol><br /><dl><dt><table><caption><tr><li><dd><th><td><a><area><img><form><input><textarea><button><select><option>' );
//strip extra whitespace except between <pre> and <textarea> tags
-<?PHP // $Id$\r
-\r
-$LANGUAGES = array (\r
-"aa" => "Afar",\r
-"ab" => "Abkhazian",\r
-"ae" => "Avestan",\r
-"af" => "Afrikaans",\r
-"am" => "Amharic",\r
-"ar" => "Arabic",\r
-"as" => "Assamese",\r
-"ay" => "Aymara",\r
-"az" => "Azerbaijani",\r
-"ba" => "Bashkir",\r
-"be" => "Belarussian",\r
-"bg" => "Bulgarian",\r
-"bh" => "Bihari",\r
-"bi" => "Bislama",\r
-"bn" => "Bengali",\r
-"bo" => "Tibetan",\r
-"br" => "Breton",\r
-"bs" => "Bosnian",\r
-"ca" => "Catalan",\r
-"ce" => "Chechen",\r
-"ch" => "Chamorro",\r
-"co" => "Corsican",\r
-"cs" => "Czech",\r
-"cu" => "Church Slavic",\r
-"cv" => "Chuvash",\r
-"cy" => "Welsh",\r
-"da" => "Danish",\r
-"de" => "German",\r
-"dz" => "Dzongkha",\r
-"el" => "Modern Greek",\r
-"en" => "English",\r
-"eo" => "Esperanto",\r
-"es" => "Spanish",\r
-"et" => "Estonian",\r
-"eu" => "Basque",\r
-"fa" => "Persian",\r
-"fi" => "Finnish",\r
-"fj" => "Fijian",\r
-"fo" => "Faroese",\r
-"fr" => "French",\r
-"fy" => "Frisian",\r
-"ga" => "Irish",\r
-"gd" => "Scots Gaelic",\r
-"gl" => "Gallegan ",\r
-"gn" => "Guarani",\r
-"gu" => "Gujarati",\r
-"gv" => "Manx",\r
-"ha" => "Hausa",\r
-"he" => "Hebrew",\r
-"hi" => "Hindi",\r
-"ho" => "Hiri Motu",\r
-"hr" => "Croatian",\r
-"hu" => "Hungarian",\r
-"hy" => "Armenian",\r
-"hz" => "Herero",\r
-"ia" => "Interlingua",\r
-"id" => "Indonesian ",\r
-"ie" => "Interlingue",\r
-"ik" => "Inupiaq ",\r
-"is" => "Icelandic",\r
-"it" => "Italian",\r
-"iu" => "Inuktitut",\r
-"ja" => "Japanese",\r
-"jw" => "Javanese",\r
-"ka" => "Georgian",\r
-"ki" => "Kikuyu",\r
-"kj" => "Kuanyama",\r
-"kk" => "Kazakh",\r
-"kl" => "Kalaallisut",\r
-"km" => "Khmer",\r
-"kn" => "Kannada",\r
-"ko" => "Korean",\r
-"ks" => "Kashmiri",\r
-"ku" => "Kurdish",\r
-"kv" => "Komi",\r
-"kw" => "Cornish",\r
-"ky" => "Kirghiz",\r
-"la" => "Latin",\r
-"lb" => "Luxembourgish",\r
-"ln" => "Lingala",\r
-"lo" => "Lao ",\r
-"lt" => "Lithuanian",\r
-"lv" => "Latvian ",\r
-"mg" => "Malagasy",\r
-"mh" => "Marshall",\r
-"mi" => "Maori",\r
-"mk" => "Macedonian",\r
-"ml" => "Malayalam",\r
-"mn" => "Mongolian",\r
-"mo" => "Moldavian",\r
-"mr" => "Marathi",\r
-"ms" => "Malay",\r
-"mt" => "Maltese",\r
-"my" => "Burmese",\r
-"na" => "Nauru",\r
-"nb" => "Norwegian Bokmål",\r
-"nd" => "Ndebele, North",\r
-"ne" => "Nepali",\r
-"ng" => "Ndonga",\r
-"nl" => "Dutch",\r
-"nn" => "Norwegian Nynorsk",\r
-"no" => "Norwegian",\r
-"nr" => "Ndebele, South",\r
-"nv" => "Navajo",\r
-"ny" => "Chichewa",\r
-"oc" => "Occitan",\r
-"om" => "Oromo",\r
-"or" => "Oriya",\r
-"os" => "Ossetian",\r
-"pa" => "Panjabi",\r
-"pi" => "Pali",\r
-"pl" => "Polish",\r
-"ps" => "Pushto",\r
-"pt" => "Portuguese",\r
-"pt_br" => "Portuguese (Brazil)",\r
-"qu" => "Quechua",\r
-"rm" => "Raeto-Romance",\r
-"rn" => "Rundi",\r
-"ro" => "Romanian",\r
-"ru" => "Russian",\r
-"rw" => "Kinyarwanda",\r
-"sa" => "Sanskrit",\r
-"sc" => "Sardinian",\r
-"sd" => "Sindhi",\r
-"se" => "Northern Sami",\r
-"sg" => "Sangho",\r
-"si" => "Sinhalese",\r
-"sk" => "Slovak",\r
-"sl" => "Slovenian",\r
-"sm" => "Samoan",\r
-"sn" => "Shona",\r
-"so" => "Somali",\r
-"sq" => "Albanian",\r
-"sr" => "Serbian",\r
-"ss" => "Swati",\r
-"st" => "Sesotho",\r
-"su" => "Sundanese",\r
-"sv" => "Swedish",\r
-"sw" => "Swahili",\r
-"ta" => "Tamil",\r
-"te" => "Telugu",\r
-"tg" => "Tajik",\r
-"th" => "Thai",\r
-"tk" => "Turkmen",\r
-"tl" => "Tagalog",\r
-"tn" => "Tswana",\r
-"tr" => "Turkish",\r
-"ts" => "Tsonga",\r
-"tt" => "Tatar",\r
-"tw" => "Twi",\r
-"ty" => "Tahitian",\r
-"ug" => "Uighur",\r
-"uk" => "Ukrainian",\r
-"ur" => "Urdu",\r
-"uz" => "Uzbek",\r
-"vi" => "Vietnamese",\r
-"vo" => "Volap",\r
-"wo" => "Wolof",\r
-"xh" => "Xhosa",\r
-"yi" => "Yiddish",\r
-"za" => "Zhuang",\r
-"zh" => "Chinese",\r
-"zu" => "Zulu");\r
-\r
-?>\r
+<?php // $Id$
+
+
+
+$LANGUAGES = array (
+
+"aa" => "Afar",
+
+"ab" => "Abkhazian",
+
+"ae" => "Avestan",
+
+"af" => "Afrikaans",
+
+"am" => "Amharic",
+
+"ar" => "Arabic",
+
+"as" => "Assamese",
+
+"ay" => "Aymara",
+
+"az" => "Azerbaijani",
+
+"ba" => "Bashkir",
+
+"be" => "Belarussian",
+
+"bg" => "Bulgarian",
+
+"bh" => "Bihari",
+
+"bi" => "Bislama",
+
+"bn" => "Bengali",
+
+"bo" => "Tibetan",
+
+"br" => "Breton",
+
+"bs" => "Bosnian",
+
+"ca" => "Catalan",
+
+"ce" => "Chechen",
+
+"ch" => "Chamorro",
+
+"co" => "Corsican",
+
+"cs" => "Czech",
+
+"cu" => "Church Slavic",
+
+"cv" => "Chuvash",
+
+"cy" => "Welsh",
+
+"da" => "Danish",
+
+"de" => "German",
+
+"dz" => "Dzongkha",
+
+"el" => "Modern Greek",
+
+"en" => "English",
+
+"eo" => "Esperanto",
+
+"es" => "Spanish",
+
+"et" => "Estonian",
+
+"eu" => "Basque",
+
+"fa" => "Persian",
+
+"fi" => "Finnish",
+
+"fj" => "Fijian",
+
+"fo" => "Faroese",
+
+"fr" => "French",
+
+"fy" => "Frisian",
+
+"ga" => "Irish",
+
+"gd" => "Scots Gaelic",
+
+"gl" => "Gallegan ",
+
+"gn" => "Guarani",
+
+"gu" => "Gujarati",
+
+"gv" => "Manx",
+
+"ha" => "Hausa",
+
+"he" => "Hebrew",
+
+"hi" => "Hindi",
+
+"ho" => "Hiri Motu",
+
+"hr" => "Croatian",
+
+"hu" => "Hungarian",
+
+"hy" => "Armenian",
+
+"hz" => "Herero",
+
+"ia" => "Interlingua",
+
+"id" => "Indonesian ",
+
+"ie" => "Interlingue",
+
+"ik" => "Inupiaq ",
+
+"is" => "Icelandic",
+
+"it" => "Italian",
+
+"iu" => "Inuktitut",
+
+"ja" => "Japanese",
+
+"jw" => "Javanese",
+
+"ka" => "Georgian",
+
+"ki" => "Kikuyu",
+
+"kj" => "Kuanyama",
+
+"kk" => "Kazakh",
+
+"kl" => "Kalaallisut",
+
+"km" => "Khmer",
+
+"kn" => "Kannada",
+
+"ko" => "Korean",
+
+"ks" => "Kashmiri",
+
+"ku" => "Kurdish",
+
+"kv" => "Komi",
+
+"kw" => "Cornish",
+
+"ky" => "Kirghiz",
+
+"la" => "Latin",
+
+"lb" => "Luxembourgish",
+
+"ln" => "Lingala",
+
+"lo" => "Lao ",
+
+"lt" => "Lithuanian",
+
+"lv" => "Latvian ",
+
+"mg" => "Malagasy",
+
+"mh" => "Marshall",
+
+"mi" => "Maori",
+
+"mk" => "Macedonian",
+
+"ml" => "Malayalam",
+
+"mn" => "Mongolian",
+
+"mo" => "Moldavian",
+
+"mr" => "Marathi",
+
+"ms" => "Malay",
+
+"mt" => "Maltese",
+
+"my" => "Burmese",
+
+"na" => "Nauru",
+
+"nb" => "Norwegian Bokmål",
+
+"nd" => "Ndebele, North",
+
+"ne" => "Nepali",
+
+"ng" => "Ndonga",
+
+"nl" => "Dutch",
+
+"nn" => "Norwegian Nynorsk",
+
+"no" => "Norwegian",
+
+"nr" => "Ndebele, South",
+
+"nv" => "Navajo",
+
+"ny" => "Chichewa",
+
+"oc" => "Occitan",
+
+"om" => "Oromo",
+
+"or" => "Oriya",
+
+"os" => "Ossetian",
+
+"pa" => "Panjabi",
+
+"pi" => "Pali",
+
+"pl" => "Polish",
+
+"ps" => "Pushto",
+
+"pt" => "Portuguese",
+
+"pt_br" => "Portuguese (Brazil)",
+
+"qu" => "Quechua",
+
+"rm" => "Raeto-Romance",
+
+"rn" => "Rundi",
+
+"ro" => "Romanian",
+
+"ru" => "Russian",
+
+"rw" => "Kinyarwanda",
+
+"sa" => "Sanskrit",
+
+"sc" => "Sardinian",
+
+"sd" => "Sindhi",
+
+"se" => "Northern Sami",
+
+"sg" => "Sangho",
+
+"si" => "Sinhalese",
+
+"sk" => "Slovak",
+
+"sl" => "Slovenian",
+
+"sm" => "Samoan",
+
+"sn" => "Shona",
+
+"so" => "Somali",
+
+"sq" => "Albanian",
+
+"sr" => "Serbian",
+
+"ss" => "Swati",
+
+"st" => "Sesotho",
+
+"su" => "Sundanese",
+
+"sv" => "Swedish",
+
+"sw" => "Swahili",
+
+"ta" => "Tamil",
+
+"te" => "Telugu",
+
+"tg" => "Tajik",
+
+"th" => "Thai",
+
+"tk" => "Turkmen",
+
+"tl" => "Tagalog",
+
+"tn" => "Tswana",
+
+"tr" => "Turkish",
+
+"ts" => "Tsonga",
+
+"tt" => "Tatar",
+
+"tw" => "Twi",
+
+"ty" => "Tahitian",
+
+"ug" => "Uighur",
+
+"uk" => "Ukrainian",
+
+"ur" => "Urdu",
+
+"uz" => "Uzbek",
+
+"vi" => "Vietnamese",
+
+"vo" => "Volap",
+
+"wo" => "Wolof",
+
+"xh" => "Xhosa",
+
+"yi" => "Yiddish",
+
+"za" => "Zhuang",
+
+"zh" => "Chinese",
+
+"zu" => "Zulu");
+
+
+
+?>
+
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// //
-<?PHP
+<?php
/// This is a tiny standalone diagnostic script to test that sessions
/// are working correctly on a given server.
///
session_start();
if (!isset($_SESSION["test"])) { // First time you call it.
- echo "<P>No session found - starting a session now.";
+ echo "<p>No session found - starting a session now.";
$_SESSION["test"] = "welcome back!";
} else { // Subsequent times you call it
- echo "<P>Session found - ".$_SESSION["test"];
- echo "<P>Sessions are working correctly</P>";
+ echo "<p>Session found - ".$_SESSION["test"];
+ echo "</p><p>Sessions are working correctly</p>";
}
-echo "<P><A HREF=\"session-test.php?random=".rand(1,10000)."\">Reload this page</A></P>";
+echo "<p><a href=\"session-test.php?random=".rand(1,10000)."\">Reload this page</a></p>";
?>
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
//
// setup.php
//
-<?PHP // $Id$
+<?php // $Id$
///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
// weblib.php - functions for web output
echo '<font size="1">';
if ($isteacher) {
$timemidnight = usergetmidnight(time());
- echo "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/course/user.php?id=$course->id&user=$user->id\">$string->activity</a><br>";
+ echo "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/course/user.php?id=$course->id&user=$user->id\">$string->activity</a><br />";
if (!iscreator($user->id) or ($isadmin and !isadmin($user->id))) { // Includes admins
if ($course->category and isteacheredit($course->id) and isstudent($course->id, $user->id)) { // Includes admins
echo "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/course/unenrol.php?id=$course->id&user=$user->id\">$string->unenrol</a><br />";
-<?php\r
-\r
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////\r
-// wiki.php - class for Wiki style formatting\r
-//\r
-// Transforms input string with Wiki style formatting into HTML\r
-// \r
-//\r
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////\r
-// //\r
-// NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT //\r
-// //\r
-// //\r
-// Copyright (C) 2003 Howard Miller - GUIDE - University of Glasgow \r
-// guide.gla.ac.uk\r
-// //\r
-// This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify //\r
-// it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by //\r
-// the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or //\r
-// (at your option) any later version. //\r
-// //\r
-// This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, //\r
-// but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of //\r
-// MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the //\r
-// GNU General Public License for more details: //\r
-// //\r
-// http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html //\r
-// //\r
-///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////\r
-\r
-// set this to 1 *IF* we are running in Moodle\r
-// it enables Moodle specific functions, otherwise 0\r
-define( "IN_MOODLE",1 );\r
-\r
-// state defines\r
-define( "STATE_NONE",1 ); // blank line has been detected, so looking for first line on next para\r
-define( "STATE_PARAGRAPH",2 ); // currently processing vanilla paragraph\r
-define( "STATE_BLOCKQUOTE",3 ); // currently processing blockquote section\r
-define( "STATE_PREFORM",4 ); // currently processing preformatted text\r
-define( "STATE_NOTIKI",5 ); // currently processing preformatted / no formatting\r
-\r
-// list defines\r
-define( "LIST_NONE", 1 ); // no lists active\r
-define( "LIST_UNORDERED", 2 ); // unordered list active\r
-define( "LIST_ORDERED", 3 ); // ordered list active\r
-define( "LIST_DEFINITION", 4 ); // definition list active\r
-\r
-\r
-class Wiki {\r
- \r
- var $block_state;\r
- var $list_state;\r
- var $list_depth;\r
- var $spelling_on;\r
- var $list_backtrack;\r
- var $output; // output buffer\r
- var $courseid;\r
-\r
- function close_block( $state ) {\r
- // provide appropriate closure for block according to state\r
- \r
- // if in list close this first\r
- $lclose = "";\r
- if ($this->list_state != LIST_NONE) {\r
- $lclose = $this->do_list( " ",true );\r
- }\r
- \r
- $sclose = "";\r
- switch ($state) {\r
- case STATE_PARAGRAPH:\r
- $sclose = "</p>\n";\r
- break;\r
- case STATE_BLOCKQUOTE:\r
- $sclose = "</blockquote>\n";\r
- break;\r
- case STATE_PREFORM:\r
- $sclose = "</pre>\n";\r
- break;\r
- case STATE_NOTIKI:\r
- $sclose = "</pre>\n";\r
- break; \r
- }\r
-\r
- return $lclose . $sclose;\r
- }\r
-\r
-\r
- function do_replace( $line, $mark, $tag ) {\r
- // do the regex thingy for things like bold, italic etc\r
- // $mark is the magic character, and $tag the HTML tag to insert\r
-\r
- // BODGE: replace inline $mark characters in places where we want them ignored\r
- // they will be put back after main substitutue, stops problems with eg, and/or\r
- $bodge = chr(1);\r
- $line = eregi_replace( '([[:alnum:]])'.$mark.'([[:alnum:]])', '\\1'.$bodge.'\\2',$line );\r
-\r
- $regex = '(^| |[(.,])'.$mark.'([^'.$mark.']*)'.$mark.'([^[:alnum:]]|$)';\r
- $replace = '\\1<'.$tag.'>\\2</'.$tag.'>\\3';\r
- $line = eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );\r
-\r
- // BODGE: back we go\r
- $line = eregi_replace( $bodge, $mark, $line );\r
-\r
- return $line;\r
- }\r
-\r
- function do_replace_sub( $line, $mark, $tag ) {\r
- // do regex for subscript and superscript (slightly different)\r
- // $mark is the magic character and $tag the HTML tag to insert\r
-\r
- $regex = $mark.'([^'.$mark.']*)'.$mark;\r
- $replace = '<'.$tag.'>\\1</'.$tag.'>';\r
- return eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );\r
- }\r
-\r
- function do_list( $line, $blank=false ) {\r
- // handle line with list character on it\r
- // if blank line implies drop to level 0\r
- \r
- // get magic character and then delete it from the line if not blank\r
- if ($blank) {\r
- $listchar="";\r
- $count = 0;\r
- }\r
- else {\r
- $listchar = $line{0}; \r
- $count = strspn( $line, $listchar );\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "^[".$listchar."]+ ", "", $line );\r
- }\r
- \r
- // find what sort of list this character represents\r
- $list_tag = "";\r
- $item_tag = "";\r
- $list_style = LIST_NONE;\r
- switch ($listchar) {\r
- case '*':\r
- $list_tag = "ul";\r
- $item_tag = "li";\r
- $list_style = LIST_UNORDERED;\r
- break;\r
- case '#':\r
- $list_tag = "ol";\r
- $item_tag = "li";\r
- $list_style = LIST_ORDERED;\r
- break;\r
- case ';':\r
- $list_tag = "dl";\r
- $item_tag = "dd";\r
- $list_style = LIST_DEFINITION;\r
- break;\r
- case ':':\r
- $list_tag = "dl";\r
- $item_tag = "dt";\r
- $list_style = LIST_DEFINITION;\r
- break; \r
- } \r
-\r
- // tag opening/closing regime now - fun bit :-)\r
- $tags = "";\r
-\r
- // if depth has reduced do number of closes to restore level\r
- for ($i=$this->list_depth; $i>$count; $i-- ) {\r
- $close_tag = array_pop( $this->list_backtrack );\r
- $tags = $tags . $close_tag;\r
- }\r
-\r
- // if depth has increased do number of opens to balance\r
- for ($i=$this->list_depth; $i<$count; $i++ ) {\r
- array_push( $this->list_backtrack, "</$list_tag>" );\r
- $tags = $tags . "<$list_tag>";\r
- }\r
-\r
- // ok, so list state is now same as style and depth same as count\r
- $this->list_state = $list_style;\r
- $this->list_depth = $count;\r
-\r
- // apply formatting to remainder of line\r
- $line = $this->line_replace( $line );\r
- \r
- if ($blank) {\r
- $newline = $tags;\r
- }\r
- else { \r
- $newline = $tags . "<$item_tag>" . $line . "</$item_tag>";\r
- }\r
-\r
- return $newline;\r
- } \r
-\r
- function line_replace( $line ) {\r
- // return line after various formatting replacements\r
- // have been made - order is vital to stop them interfering with each other\r
- \r
- if (IN_MOODLE==1) {\r
- global $CFG;\r
- }\r
-\r
- // convert < and > (kills HTML)\r
- $line = str_replace( ">", ">", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "<", "<", $line );\r
- \r
- // ---- (at least) means a <HR>\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "^-{4}.*", "<div class=\"hr\"><hr /></div>", $line );\r
- \r
- // is this a list line (starts with * # ; :) \r
- if (eregi( "^([*]+|[#]+|[;]+|[:]+) ", $line )) {\r
- $line = $this->do_list( $line ); \r
- } \r
-\r
- // typographic conventions\r
- $line = str_replace( "--", "—", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( " - ", " – ", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "...", " … ", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "(R)", "®", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "(r)", "®", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "(TM)", "™", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "(tm)", "™", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "(C)", "©", $line );\r
- // $line = str_replace( "(c)", "©", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "1/4", "¼", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "1/2", "½", $line );\r
- $line = str_replace( "3/4", "¾", $line );\r
-\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "([[:digit:]]+[[:space:]]*)x([[:space:]]*[[:digit:]]+)", "\\1×\\2", $line ); // (digits) x (digits) - multiply \r
-\r
- // do formatting tags\r
- // NOTE: The / replacement *has* to be first, or it will screw the \r
- // HTML tags that are added by the other ones\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "/", "em" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\*", "strong" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\+", "ins" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "-", "del" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace_sub( $line, "~", "sub" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace_sub( $line, "\^", "sup" );\r
- // $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\"", "q" );\r
- // $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "'", "q" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "%", "code" );\r
- $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "@", "cite" );\r
-\r
- // replace quotes\r
- $regex = '(^| |[(.,])\"([^\"]*)\"([^[:alnum:]]|$)';\r
- $replace = '\\1“\\2”\\3';\r
- $line = eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );\r
- \r
- // convert urls into proper link with optional link text URL(text)\r
- $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]]+)://([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "\\1<A HREF=\"\\2://\\3\\4\" TARGET=\"newpage\">\\5</A>", $line);\r
- $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]])www\.([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])\(([^)]+)\)", \r
- "\\1<A HREF=\"http://www.\\2\\3\" TARGET=\"newpage\">\\5</A>", $line);\r
- \r
- // make urls (with and without httpd) into proper links\r
- $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]]+)://([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])",\r
- "\\1<A HREF=\"\\2://\\3\\4\" TARGET=\"newpage\">\\2://\\3\\4</A>", $line);\r
- $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]])www\.([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])", \r
- "\\1<A HREF=\"http://www.\\2\\3\" TARGET=\"newpage\">www.\\2\\3</A>", $line);\r
-\r
- // make email addresses into mailtos....\r
- $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]._-]+@[[:alnum:]._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "\\1<a href=\"mailto:\\2\">\\3</a>", $line);\r
-\r
- // !# at the beginning of any lines means a heading\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "^!([1-6]) (.*)$", "<h\\1>\\2</h\\1>", $line );\r
- \r
- // acronym handing, example HTML(Hypertext Markyp Language)\r
- $line = ereg_replace( "([A-Z]+)\(([^)]+)\)", "<acronym title=\"\\2\">\\1</acronym>", $line );\r
-\r
- // *Moodle Specific* \r
- if (IN_MOODLE==1) {\r
- // Replace resource link >>##(Description Text)\r
- $line = eregi_replace( " ([a-zA-Z]+):([0-9]+)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- " <a href=\"".$CFG->wwwroot."/mod/\\1/view.php?id=\\2\">\\3</a> ", $line );\r
-\r
- // Replace picture resource link \r
- // global $course; // This is a bit risky - it won't work everywhere\r
-\r
- if ($CFG->slasharguments) {\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "/([a-zA-Z0-9./_-]+)(png|gif|jpg)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "<img src=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php/$this->courseid/\\1\\2\" alt=\"\\3\" />", $line );\r
- } else {\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "/([a-zA-Z0-9./_-]+)(png|gif|jpg)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "<img src=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php\?file=$this->courseid/\\1\\2\" alt=\"\\3\" />", $line );\r
- }\r
-\r
- // Replace everything else resource link\r
- if ($CFG->slasharguments) {\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "file:/([[:alnum:]/._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php/$this->courseid/\\1\" >\\2</a>", $line );\r
- } else {\r
- $line = eregi_replace( "file:/([[:alnum:]/._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",\r
- "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php\?file=$this->courseid/\\1\" >\\2</a>", $line );\r
- }\r
-\r
- replace_smilies( $line );\r
-\r
- }\r
- \r
- return $line;\r
- }\r
-\r
-\r
- function spellcheck( $line,$pspell_link ) {\r
-\r
- // split line into words\r
- $words = preg_split( "/[\s,-.]/ ", $line );\r
-\r
- // run through words\r
- $newline = "";\r
- foreach($words as $word) {\r
- $check_word = eregi_replace( "[,;:./&()* ?\"]", "", $word );\r
- $check_word = eregi_replace( "^'|'$","",$check_word );\r
-\r
- // words not to check\r
- $docheck = true;\r
- if (eregi("[0-9]",$check_word)) { $docheck=false; }\r
-\r
- if ( $docheck && (!pspell_check( $pspell_link, $check_word)) ) {\r
- $suggests = pspell_suggest( $pspell_link,$check_word );\r
- $suggest_line = "";\r
- foreach($suggests as $suggest) {\r
- $suggest_line = $suggest_line . " " . $suggest;\r
- }\r
- $word = "<span class=\"spellcheck\"><acronym title=\"$suggest_line\">$word</acronym></span>";\r
- }\r
- $newline = $newline . " " . $word;\r
- }\r
-\r
- return $newline;\r
- }\r
-\r
-\r
- function format( $content, $courseid ) {\r
- // main entry point for processing TikiText\r
- // $content is string containing text with Tiki formatting\r
- // return: string containing XHTML formatting\r
-\r
- // initialisation stuff\r
- $this->output = "";\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_NONE;\r
- $this->list_state = LIST_NONE;\r
- $this->list_depth = 0;\r
- $this->list_backtrack = array();\r
- $this->spelling_on = false;\r
- $this->courseid = $courseid;\r
-\r
- // split content into array of single lines\r
- $lines = explode( "\n",$content );\r
- $buffer = "";\r
-\r
- // add a wiki div tag for CSS\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "<div class=\"wiki\">\n";\r
-\r
- // run through lines\r
- foreach( $lines as $line ) {\r
-\r
- // is this a blank line?\r
- $blank_line = eregi( "^[[:blank:]\r]*$", $line );\r
- if ($blank_line) {\r
- // first end current block according to state\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->close_block( $this->block_state );\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_NONE;\r
- continue;\r
- }\r
-\r
- // is this a spelling line\r
- $spell_parms = array();\r
- $spelling = eregi( "^!SPELL:([a-z]+):?(american|british|canadian)?(\r| |$)", $line,$spell_parms );\r
- if ($spelling) {\r
- $this->spelling_on = true;\r
- $pspell_link = pspell_new( $spell_parms[1], $spell_parms[2] );\r
- $line = "";\r
- }\r
-\r
- // spellcheck\r
- if ($this->spelling_on) {\r
- $line = $this->spellcheck( $line, $pspell_link );\r
- }\r
- \r
- // act now depending on current block state\r
- if ($this->block_state == STATE_NONE) {\r
- // first character of line defines block type\r
- if (eregi( "^> ",$line )) {\r
- // blockquote\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "<blockquote>\n";\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace( eregi_replace( "^>","",$line) ). "\n";\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_BLOCKQUOTE;\r
- }\r
- else\r
- if (eregi( "^ ",$line) ) {\r
- // preformatted text\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "<pre>\n";\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_PREFORM;\r
- }\r
- else \r
- if (eregi("^\% ",$line) ) {\r
- // preformatted text - no processing\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "<pre>\n";\r
- $buffer = $buffer . eregi_replace( "^\%","",$line) . "\n";\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_NOTIKI;\r
- } \r
- else {\r
- // ordinary paragraph\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "<p>\n";\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";\r
- $this->block_state = STATE_PARAGRAPH; \r
- }\r
- continue;\r
- }\r
- \r
- if (($this->block_state == STATE_PARAGRAPH) |\r
- ($this->block_state == STATE_BLOCKQUOTE) |\r
- ($this->block_state == STATE_PREFORM) ) {\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";\r
- continue;\r
- }\r
- elseif ($this->block_state == STATE_NOTIKI) {\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $line . "\n";\r
- } \r
- }\r
-\r
- // close off any block level tags\r
- $buffer = $buffer . $this->close_block( $this->block_state );\r
-\r
- // close off wiki div\r
- $buffer = $buffer . "</div>\n";\r
-\r
- //return $buffer; \r
- return $buffer;\r
- }\r
-\r
-}\r
-\r
-?>\r
+<?php
+
+
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// wiki.php - class for Wiki style formatting
+
+//
+
+// Transforms input string with Wiki style formatting into HTML
+
+//
+
+//
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+// //
+
+// NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT //
+
+// //
+
+// //
+
+// Copyright (C) 2003 Howard Miller - GUIDE - University of Glasgow
+
+// guide.gla.ac.uk
+
+// //
+
+// This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify //
+
+// it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by //
+
+// the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or //
+
+// (at your option) any later version. //
+
+// //
+
+// This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, //
+
+// but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of //
+
+// MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the //
+
+// GNU General Public License for more details: //
+
+// //
+
+// http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html //
+
+// //
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+
+
+// set this to 1 *IF* we are running in Moodle
+
+// it enables Moodle specific functions, otherwise 0
+
+define( "IN_MOODLE",1 );
+
+
+
+// state defines
+
+define( "STATE_NONE",1 ); // blank line has been detected, so looking for first line on next para
+
+define( "STATE_PARAGRAPH",2 ); // currently processing vanilla paragraph
+
+define( "STATE_BLOCKQUOTE",3 ); // currently processing blockquote section
+
+define( "STATE_PREFORM",4 ); // currently processing preformatted text
+
+define( "STATE_NOTIKI",5 ); // currently processing preformatted / no formatting
+
+
+
+// list defines
+
+define( "LIST_NONE", 1 ); // no lists active
+
+define( "LIST_UNORDERED", 2 ); // unordered list active
+
+define( "LIST_ORDERED", 3 ); // ordered list active
+
+define( "LIST_DEFINITION", 4 ); // definition list active
+
+
+
+
+
+class Wiki {
+
+
+
+ var $block_state;
+
+ var $list_state;
+
+ var $list_depth;
+
+ var $spelling_on;
+
+ var $list_backtrack;
+
+ var $output; // output buffer
+
+ var $courseid;
+
+
+
+ function close_block( $state ) {
+
+ // provide appropriate closure for block according to state
+
+
+
+ // if in list close this first
+
+ $lclose = "";
+
+ if ($this->list_state != LIST_NONE) {
+
+ $lclose = $this->do_list( " ",true );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ $sclose = "";
+
+ switch ($state) {
+
+ case STATE_PARAGRAPH:
+
+ $sclose = "</p>\n";
+
+ break;
+
+ case STATE_BLOCKQUOTE:
+
+ $sclose = "</blockquote>\n";
+
+ break;
+
+ case STATE_PREFORM:
+
+ $sclose = "</pre>\n";
+
+ break;
+
+ case STATE_NOTIKI:
+
+ $sclose = "</pre>\n";
+
+ break;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ return $lclose . $sclose;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+
+
+ function do_replace( $line, $mark, $tag ) {
+
+ // do the regex thingy for things like bold, italic etc
+
+ // $mark is the magic character, and $tag the HTML tag to insert
+
+
+
+ // BODGE: replace inline $mark characters in places where we want them ignored
+
+ // they will be put back after main substitutue, stops problems with eg, and/or
+
+ $bodge = chr(1);
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( '([[:alnum:]])'.$mark.'([[:alnum:]])', '\\1'.$bodge.'\\2',$line );
+
+
+
+ $regex = '(^| |[(.,])'.$mark.'([^'.$mark.']*)'.$mark.'([^[:alnum:]]|$)';
+
+ $replace = '\\1<'.$tag.'>\\2</'.$tag.'>\\3';
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );
+
+
+
+ // BODGE: back we go
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( $bodge, $mark, $line );
+
+
+
+ return $line;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ function do_replace_sub( $line, $mark, $tag ) {
+
+ // do regex for subscript and superscript (slightly different)
+
+ // $mark is the magic character and $tag the HTML tag to insert
+
+
+
+ $regex = $mark.'([^'.$mark.']*)'.$mark;
+
+ $replace = '<'.$tag.'>\\1</'.$tag.'>';
+
+ return eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ function do_list( $line, $blank=false ) {
+
+ // handle line with list character on it
+
+ // if blank line implies drop to level 0
+
+
+
+ // get magic character and then delete it from the line if not blank
+
+ if ($blank) {
+
+ $listchar="";
+
+ $count = 0;
+
+ }
+
+ else {
+
+ $listchar = $line{0};
+
+ $count = strspn( $line, $listchar );
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "^[".$listchar."]+ ", "", $line );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // find what sort of list this character represents
+
+ $list_tag = "";
+
+ $item_tag = "";
+
+ $list_style = LIST_NONE;
+
+ switch ($listchar) {
+
+ case '*':
+
+ $list_tag = "ul";
+
+ $item_tag = "li";
+
+ $list_style = LIST_UNORDERED;
+
+ break;
+
+ case '#':
+
+ $list_tag = "ol";
+
+ $item_tag = "li";
+
+ $list_style = LIST_ORDERED;
+
+ break;
+
+ case ';':
+
+ $list_tag = "dl";
+
+ $item_tag = "dd";
+
+ $list_style = LIST_DEFINITION;
+
+ break;
+
+ case ':':
+
+ $list_tag = "dl";
+
+ $item_tag = "dt";
+
+ $list_style = LIST_DEFINITION;
+
+ break;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // tag opening/closing regime now - fun bit :-)
+
+ $tags = "";
+
+
+
+ // if depth has reduced do number of closes to restore level
+
+ for ($i=$this->list_depth; $i>$count; $i-- ) {
+
+ $close_tag = array_pop( $this->list_backtrack );
+
+ $tags = $tags . $close_tag;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // if depth has increased do number of opens to balance
+
+ for ($i=$this->list_depth; $i<$count; $i++ ) {
+
+ array_push( $this->list_backtrack, "</$list_tag>" );
+
+ $tags = $tags . "<$list_tag>";
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // ok, so list state is now same as style and depth same as count
+
+ $this->list_state = $list_style;
+
+ $this->list_depth = $count;
+
+
+
+ // apply formatting to remainder of line
+
+ $line = $this->line_replace( $line );
+
+
+
+ if ($blank) {
+
+ $newline = $tags;
+
+ }
+
+ else {
+
+ $newline = $tags . "<$item_tag>" . $line . "</$item_tag>";
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ return $newline;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ function line_replace( $line ) {
+
+ // return line after various formatting replacements
+
+ // have been made - order is vital to stop them interfering with each other
+
+
+
+ if (IN_MOODLE==1) {
+
+ global $CFG;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // convert < and > (kills HTML)
+
+ $line = str_replace( ">", ">", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "<", "<", $line );
+
+
+
+ // ---- (at least) means a <hr />
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "^-{4}.*", "<div class=\"hr\"><hr /></div>", $line );
+
+
+
+ // is this a list line (starts with * # ; :)
+
+ if (eregi( "^([*]+|[#]+|[;]+|[:]+) ", $line )) {
+
+ $line = $this->do_list( $line );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // typographic conventions
+
+ $line = str_replace( "--", "—", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( " - ", " – ", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "...", " … ", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "(R)", "®", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "(r)", "®", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "(TM)", "™", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "(tm)", "™", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "(C)", "©", $line );
+
+ // $line = str_replace( "(c)", "©", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "1/4", "¼", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "1/2", "½", $line );
+
+ $line = str_replace( "3/4", "¾", $line );
+
+
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "([[:digit:]]+[[:space:]]*)x([[:space:]]*[[:digit:]]+)", "\\1×\\2", $line ); // (digits) x (digits) - multiply
+
+
+
+ // do formatting tags
+
+ // NOTE: The / replacement *has* to be first, or it will screw the
+
+ // HTML tags that are added by the other ones
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "/", "em" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\*", "strong" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\+", "ins" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "-", "del" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace_sub( $line, "~", "sub" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace_sub( $line, "\^", "sup" );
+
+ // $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "\"", "q" );
+
+ // $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "'", "q" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "%", "code" );
+
+ $line = $this->do_replace( $line, "@", "cite" );
+
+
+
+ // replace quotes
+
+ $regex = '(^| |[(.,])\"([^\"]*)\"([^[:alnum:]]|$)';
+
+ $replace = '\\1“\\2”\\3';
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( $regex, $replace, $line );
+
+
+
+ // convert urls into proper link with optional link text URL(text)
+
+ $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]]+)://([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "\\1<a href=\"\\2://\\3\\4\" target=\"newpage\">\\5</a>", $line);
+
+ $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]])www\.([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "\\1<a href=\"http://www.\\2\\3\" target=\"newpage\">\\5</a>", $line);
+
+
+
+ // make urls (with and without httpd) into proper links
+
+ $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]]+)://([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])",
+
+ "\\1<a href=\"\\2://\\3\\4\" target=\"newpage\">\\2://\\3\\4</a>", $line);
+
+ $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]])www\.([^[:space:]]*)([[:alnum:]#?/&=])",
+
+ "\\1<a href=\"http://www.\\2\\3\" target=\"newpage\">www.\\2\\3</a>", $line);
+
+
+
+ // make email addresses into mailtos....
+
+ $line = eregi_replace("([[:space:]]|^)([[:alnum:]._-]+@[[:alnum:]._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "\\1<a href=\"mailto:\\2\">\\3</a>", $line);
+
+
+
+ // !# at the beginning of any lines means a heading
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "^!([1-6]) (.*)$", "<h\\1>\\2</h\\1>", $line );
+
+
+
+ // acronym handing, example HTML(Hypertext Markyp Language)
+
+ $line = ereg_replace( "([A-Z]+)\(([^)]+)\)", "<acronym title=\"\\2\">\\1</acronym>", $line );
+
+
+
+ // *Moodle Specific*
+
+ if (IN_MOODLE==1) {
+
+ // Replace resource link >>##(Description Text)
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( " ([a-zA-Z]+):([0-9]+)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ " <a href=\"".$CFG->wwwroot."/mod/\\1/view.php?id=\\2\">\\3</a> ", $line );
+
+
+
+ // Replace picture resource link
+
+ // global $course; // This is a bit risky - it won't work everywhere
+
+
+
+ if ($CFG->slasharguments) {
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "/([a-zA-Z0-9./_-]+)(png|gif|jpg)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "<img src=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php/$this->courseid/\\1\\2\" alt=\"\\3\" />", $line );
+
+ } else {
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "/([a-zA-Z0-9./_-]+)(png|gif|jpg)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "<img src=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php\?file=$this->courseid/\\1\\2\" alt=\"\\3\" />", $line );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // Replace everything else resource link
+
+ if ($CFG->slasharguments) {
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "file:/([[:alnum:]/._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php/$this->courseid/\\1\" >\\2</a>", $line );
+
+ } else {
+
+ $line = eregi_replace( "file:/([[:alnum:]/._-]+)\(([^)]+)\)",
+
+ "<a href=\"$CFG->wwwroot/file.php\?file=$this->courseid/\\1\" >\\2</a>", $line );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ replace_smilies( $line );
+
+
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ return $line;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+
+
+ function spellcheck( $line,$pspell_link ) {
+
+
+
+ // split line into words
+
+ $words = preg_split( "/[\s,-.]/ ", $line );
+
+
+
+ // run through words
+
+ $newline = "";
+
+ foreach($words as $word) {
+
+ $check_word = eregi_replace( "[,;:./&()* ?\"]", "", $word );
+
+ $check_word = eregi_replace( "^'|'$","",$check_word );
+
+
+
+ // words not to check
+
+ $docheck = true;
+
+ if (eregi("[0-9]",$check_word)) { $docheck=false; }
+
+
+
+ if ( $docheck && (!pspell_check( $pspell_link, $check_word)) ) {
+
+ $suggests = pspell_suggest( $pspell_link,$check_word );
+
+ $suggest_line = "";
+
+ foreach($suggests as $suggest) {
+
+ $suggest_line = $suggest_line . " " . $suggest;
+
+ }
+
+ $word = "<span class=\"spellcheck\"><acronym title=\"$suggest_line\">$word</acronym></span>";
+
+ }
+
+ $newline = $newline . " " . $word;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ return $newline;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+
+
+ function format( $content, $courseid ) {
+
+ // main entry point for processing TikiText
+
+ // $content is string containing text with Tiki formatting
+
+ // return: string containing XHTML formatting
+
+
+
+ // initialisation stuff
+
+ $this->output = "";
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_NONE;
+
+ $this->list_state = LIST_NONE;
+
+ $this->list_depth = 0;
+
+ $this->list_backtrack = array();
+
+ $this->spelling_on = false;
+
+ $this->courseid = $courseid;
+
+
+
+ // split content into array of single lines
+
+ $lines = explode( "\n",$content );
+
+ $buffer = "";
+
+
+
+ // add a wiki div tag for CSS
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "<div class=\"wiki\">\n";
+
+
+
+ // run through lines
+
+ foreach( $lines as $line ) {
+
+
+
+ // is this a blank line?
+
+ $blank_line = eregi( "^[[:blank:]\r]*$", $line );
+
+ if ($blank_line) {
+
+ // first end current block according to state
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->close_block( $this->block_state );
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_NONE;
+
+ continue;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // is this a spelling line
+
+ $spell_parms = array();
+
+ $spelling = eregi( "^!SPELL:([a-z]+):?(american|british|canadian)?(\r| |$)", $line,$spell_parms );
+
+ if ($spelling) {
+
+ $this->spelling_on = true;
+
+ $pspell_link = pspell_new( $spell_parms[1], $spell_parms[2] );
+
+ $line = "";
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // spellcheck
+
+ if ($this->spelling_on) {
+
+ $line = $this->spellcheck( $line, $pspell_link );
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // act now depending on current block state
+
+ if ($this->block_state == STATE_NONE) {
+
+ // first character of line defines block type
+
+ if (eregi( "^> ",$line )) {
+
+ // blockquote
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "<blockquote>\n";
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace( eregi_replace( "^>","",$line) ). "\n";
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_BLOCKQUOTE;
+
+ }
+
+ else
+
+ if (eregi( "^ ",$line) ) {
+
+ // preformatted text
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "<pre>\n";
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_PREFORM;
+
+ }
+
+ else
+
+ if (eregi("^\% ",$line) ) {
+
+ // preformatted text - no processing
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "<pre>\n";
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . eregi_replace( "^\%","",$line) . "\n";
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_NOTIKI;
+
+ }
+
+ else {
+
+ // ordinary paragraph
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "<p>\n";
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";
+
+ $this->block_state = STATE_PARAGRAPH;
+
+ }
+
+ continue;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ if (($this->block_state == STATE_PARAGRAPH) |
+
+ ($this->block_state == STATE_BLOCKQUOTE) |
+
+ ($this->block_state == STATE_PREFORM) ) {
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->line_replace($line) . "\n";
+
+ continue;
+
+ }
+
+ elseif ($this->block_state == STATE_NOTIKI) {
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $line . "\n";
+
+ }
+
+ }
+
+
+
+ // close off any block level tags
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . $this->close_block( $this->block_state );
+
+
+
+ // close off wiki div
+
+ $buffer = $buffer . "</div>\n";
+
+
+
+ //return $buffer;
+
+ return $buffer;
+
+ }
+
+
+
+}
+
+
+
+?>
+
projects / moodle.git / commitdiff